Nissan Altima 2008 Owner's Manual

Nissan Altima 2008 Owner's Manual
Add to My manuals

advertisement

Assistant Bot

Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.

Manual
Nissan Altima 2008 Owner's Manual | Manualzz

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!

NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.

ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.

ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under

NISSAN warranties.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and without obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material – special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

BLUETOOTH

t is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A. and licensed to

Visteon and Xanavi

Informatics

Corporation.

© 2008 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

OR

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

8

9

10

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2

Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3

Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8

Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-12

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2

Illustrated table of contents

1.

Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-25)

2.

Rear seat belts (P. 1-13)

3.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)

4.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)

5.

Front-seat Active Head Restraints

(P. 1-11, P. 1-12)

6.

Front seat belts (P. 1-13)

7.

Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-42)

8.

Seats (P. 1-2)

9.

Occupant classification sensor

(pattern sensor) (P.1-50)

10. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-55)

11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-23)

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WII0100

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

EXTERIOR FRONT

Coupe

1.

Power windows (P. 2-42)

2.

Windshield (P. 8-20)

3.

Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-26)

4.

Engine hood (P. 3-16)

5.

Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-13)

6.

Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)

7.

Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-27)

8.

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

9.

Tire pressure (P. 8-33)

10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)

11. Tire chains (P. 8-41)

12. Mirrors (P. 3-21)

13. Door locks, Intelligent key system, keys, request button (P. 3-3, 3-6, 3-2, 3-8)

LII0114

Illustrated table of contents

0-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

0-4

Illustrated table of contents

Sedan

1.

Power windows (P. 2-42)

2.

Windshield (P. 8-20)

3.

Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-26)

4.

Engine hood (P. 3-16)

5.

Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-13)

6.

Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)

7.

Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-27)

8.

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

9.

Tire pressure (P. 8-33)

10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)

11. Tire chains (P. 8-41)

12. Mirrors (P. 3-21)

13. Door locks, Intelligent key system, keys, request button (P. 3-3, 3-6, 3-2, 3-8)

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII0094

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

EXTERIOR REAR

Coupe

1.

Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-27)

2.

Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-17)

3.

Trunk lid (P. 3-16)

4.

Vehicle loading (P.9-12)

5.

Exterior trunk lid release/request button

(P.3-11)

6.

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

7.

Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-18, P. 9-3)

8.

Fuel-filler door (P. 3-18)

WII0125

Illustrated table of contents

0-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Sedan

1.

Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-27)

2.

Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-17)

3.

Trunk lid (P. 3-16)

4.

Vehicle loading (P.9-12)

5.

Exterior trunk lid release/request button

(P.3-11)

6.

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

7.

Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-18, P. 9-3)

8.

Fuel-filler door (P. 3-18)

9.

Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)

0-6

Illustrated table of contents

LII0095

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1.

Interior trunk access (P. 1-9)

2.

Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-45)

3.

Sun visors (P. 3-20)

4.

Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-47)

5.

HomeLink T (if so equipped) (P. 2-49)

6.

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror

(if so equipped) (P. 3-21)

7.

Glove box (P. 2-39)

8.

Front cup holders (P. 2-38)

9.

Front console (P. 2-40)

10. Front seat (P. 1-2)

11. Rear seat (P. 1-9)

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WII0126

Illustrated table of contents

0-7

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1.

Vents (P. 4-10)

2.

Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-27)

WIC1258

3.

Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped)/Bluetooth

T hands-free phone system (if so equipped)

(P. 4-44, P. 4-46, P. 4-60)

4.

Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

0-8

Illustrated table of contents

5.

Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-42, P. 2-33)

6.

Cruise control main/set switch

(P. 5-17)

7.

Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-26)

8.

Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-6)

9.

Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-32)

10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-51)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

12. Glove box (P. 2-39)

13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)

14. Heater and air conditioner (manual or automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-18)

15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-10)

16. Audio system controls (P. 4-20)

17. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-20)

18. Vehicle information display controls

(P. 2-16)

19. Hood release (P. 3-16)

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

20. Traction Control System (TCS) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-23)

Trunk opener (P. 3-16)

Intelligent Key port (P. 5-6)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents

0-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-10

Illustrated table of contents

QR25DE engine

1.

Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

2.

Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

3.

Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14, 8-14)

4.

Air cleaner (P. 8-19)

5.

Fuse block (P. 8-22)

6.

Battery (P. 8-15)

7.

Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)

8.

Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

9.

Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

10. Drive belt location (P.8-17)

11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI0553

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

VQ35DE engine

1.

Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

2.

Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

3.

Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14, 8-14)

4.

Air cleaner (P. 8-19)

5.

Fuse block (P. 8-22)

6.

Battery (P. 8-15)

7.

Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)

8.

Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

9.

Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

10. Drive belt location (P.8-17)

11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI0552

Illustrated table of contents

0-11

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning light or

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warning light (if so equipped)

Brake warning light

2-10

2-11 or

Charge warning light

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) check warning light (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light

Intelligent Key system warning light

2-11

2-11

2-11

2-12

0-12

Illustrated table of contents

Warning light

Name Page

Low tire pressure warning light

Master warning light

2-12

2-13

2-13 Seat belt warning light and chime

Supplemental air bag warning light

1-57

Indicator light

Name Page

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) position indicator light

Front passenger air bag status light

High beam indicator light (blue)

2-14

2-14

2-14

Indicator light

Name Page

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Security indicator light

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Traction Control

System off indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamic

Control off indicator light (if so equipped)

2-14

2-25

2-15

2-34

2-15

2-34

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Front-seat Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13

Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

System (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

SEATS

WARNING

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

ARS1152

For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this section.

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

1-2

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The seatback should not be reclined

anymore than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0738

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

WRS0739

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

WRS0740

Seat lifter

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0841

FRONT POWER SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for driver’s seat)

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

Coupe

● Pull up on the upper seatback release lever to release the seatback only. Push the seatback forward to allow for access to items behind the front seat. Push the seatback to the rear of the vehicle to return the seatback to the upright and locked position. The upper seatback release lever does not need to be used.

1-4

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Before driving the vehicle, return the seatback to an upright seating position after manually releasing it. Also, make sure the seat is locked in place. Failure to do so may cause the seat to move in a collision or sudden stop. This may result in damage to the seat or personal injury.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P

(Park).

WRS0751

CAUTION

Do not operate the power recline switch

when the seatback has been manually released using the upper seatback release lever the seat.

s

. Doing so can damage

Do not pull on the upper seatback re-

lease lever or the trim to return the seatback to a normal seating position.

Doing so may damage the seat.

Sedan

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0842

Coupe shown, Sedan similar

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s seat)

Pull the lever up or push down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

WRS0743

Type A

Lumbar support (if so equipped for driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Push the switch (Type A) forward or backward or move the lever (Type B) up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Type B

WRS0843

1-6

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WRS0789

Entry to the rear seat from outside of the vehicle on the front passenger side

(Coupe)

Pull the seat recliner lever position folding the seat back forward ing the seat track.

s to the uppermost s

, releas-

Slide the entire seat forward for access to the rear seat.

To return the seat to a locked position:

Push the upper seat back rearward until the seat back and track are locked.

Operating tips:

● The seat back and track will not lock until the seat back is returned rearward.

● The seat track will not lock until it reaches the first position memory point.

● The seat back will return to the first locking notch when using the seat recliner lever.

WRS0791

Entry to the rear seat from outside of the vehicle on the driver’s side using the upper seatback release lever

(Coupe)

The use of the upper seatback release lever for the driver to: s on the inboard side of the passenger seat, allows

,

● allow passenger entry to the rear seat from outside of the vehicle.

● access items located behind the front passenger seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-7

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Pull the upper seatback release lever ward s

, releasing the seat track.

s to the uppermost position, folding the seat back for-

2

Slide the entire seat forward for access to the rear seat.

To return the seat to a locked position:

Push the upper seat back rearward until the seat back and track are locked.

Operating tips:

● The seat back and track will not lock until the seat back is returned rearward.

● The seat track will not lock until it reaches the first position memory point.

● The seat back will return to an upright seating position if the upper seatback release lever is pulled to the uppermost position.

WRS0790

Exiting from the rear seat on the front passenger side, using the lower seat back release lever (coupe)

Press on the lower seat back release lever seat back forward s

, releasing the seat track.

s until it reaches the lowermost position. Fold the

2

Slide the entire seat forward for access from the rear seat.

To return the seat to a locked position:

Push the upper seat back rearward until the seat back and track are locked.

Operating tips:

● The seat back and track will not lock until the seat back is returned rearward.

● The seat track will not lock until it reaches the first position memory point.

● The seat back will return to an upright seating position if the lower seat back release lever is pushed to the uppermost position.

1-8

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0791

Exiting from the rear seat on the driver’s side, using the upper seatback release lever (coupe)

Pull the upper seatback release lever ward s

, releasing the seat track.

s to the uppermost position, folding the seat back for-

2

Slide the entire seat forward to exit from the rear seat.

To return the seat to a locked position:

Push the upper seat back rearward until the seat back and track are locked.

Operating tips:

● The seat back and track will not lock until the seat back is returned rearward.

● The seat track will not lock until it reaches the first position memory point.

● The seat back will return to an upright seating position if the upper seatback release lever is pulled to the uppermost position.

WRS0794

FOLDING REAR SEAT

Interior trunk access

The trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

1. Open access cover on rear parcel shelf.

2. Push down on the button on the rear parcel shelf.

3. Fold down the passenger side seatback.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

WRS0745

To fold down the driver’s side of the rear seat, reach through the opening and pull on the strap s located behind the seat.

The rear seats can be locked using the mechanical key to prevent unauthorized access. For more information on keys, refer to “Keys” in the “Predriving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

1-10

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

Center armrest (if so equipped)

WRS0167

Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.

LRS0746

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat.

WRS0134

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of your ears.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-11

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

SPA1025

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Always adjust the head restraints prop-

erly as specified in this section. Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the Active Head Restraint.

Active Head Restraints are designed to

supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident.

Do not attach anything to the head re-

straint stalks. Doing so could impair

Active Head Restraint function.

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as described earlier in this section.

1-12

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-13

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.

SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING

The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

1-14

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

SSS0014

WARNING

Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.

Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-

vated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor.

See your NISSAN dealer.

Removal and installation of preten-

sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-15

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:

● Rear-facing child restraint

● Front-facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Front-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a front-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See “Child Restraints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protection.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) for the front passenger. See “Supplemental restraint system” later in this section.

1-16

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Infants

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Small children

Children that are over one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in

(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

(18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt.

The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-17

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

Manual front seat shown

Fastening the seat belts

WRS0738

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this section.

WRS0137

Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock during

a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

WRS0138

Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1-18

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child restraints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt operation, see a NISSAN dealer.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-19

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(Sedan, front seats)

LRS0242

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)

To adjust, pull out the adjustment button move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired s s and position , so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

The shoulder belt comfort assist arm can be adjusted to the position best for you. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.) To adjust, move the arm up as indicated.

WARNING

After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.

The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

LRS0821

Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)

The shoulder arm can be adjusted to allow easier access to the shoulder belt. The arm can also be folded down to allow rear seat passengers easier access.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance if an extender is required.

1-20

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.

Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

ARS1098

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-21

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0256

WARNING

Infants and small children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle.

Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death.

Infants and small children should never

be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

NISSAN recommends that the child re-

straint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see “Child restraint installation using the seat belts” later in this section.

Improper use or improper installation

of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident.

Follow all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle.

1-22

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

Child restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-

tioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible.

After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the LATCH attachment or by the seat belt path. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm). If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

When your child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System or LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

System (LATCH)” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See

“Child restraint installation using the seat belts” later in this section. In general, child restraints are also designed to be installed with a lap/shoulder seat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on front-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

WRS0795

LATCH system anchor locations

LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS

FOR CHILDREN SYSTEM (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-23

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0796

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH anchors.

WARNING

Attach LATCH compatible child re-

straints only at the locations shown in the illustration. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

WRS0829

(if so equipped)

Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using the

LATCH anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

Child restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

1-24

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LATCH child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child restraint” later in this section for installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. See “Child restraint installation using LATCH” later in this section.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT

If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to the anchor point.

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.

WRS0797

Top Tether Anchor Point Locations

Anchor points shelf.

are located on the rear parcel

Installing top tether strap

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-25

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

LRS0798

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

System (rear outboard seating positions only) or the seat belt, as applicable.

Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat.

Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback.

Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor bracket that provides the straightest installation.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING LATCH

WARNING

Attach LATCH compatible child re-

straints only at the locations shown. For the LATCH lower anchor locations, see

“Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children System (LATCH)” in this section. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

The LATCH anchors are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Inspect the lower anchors by inserting

your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH anchors are obstructed.

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child restraint using LATCH:

1-26

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

LRS0824

(if so equipped)

1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap s

, pull the flap down to allow access to the anchors s

.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0799

Front facing web-mounted – step 3

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

4. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

WRS0800

Front facing rigid-mounted – step 3

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-27

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

8. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4 through 7.

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using LATCH System:

LRS0671

Front facing – step 5

5. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in this section.

WRS0697

Front facing – step 7

7. Before placing the child in the child restraint, hold the child restraint near the LATCH attachment and use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place.

It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the anchor attachments to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to another seating position and try again, or try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-28

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

LRS0824

(if so equipped)

1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap s

, pull the flap down to allow access to the anchors s

.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Check to make sure the

LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

WRS0801

Rear facing web-mounted – step 3

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

WRS0802

Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 3

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-29

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

6. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5.

LRS0673

Rear facing – step 4

4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

LRS0674

Rear facing – step 5

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, hold the child restraint near the LATCH attachment and use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place.

It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the anchor attachments to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to another seating position and try again, or try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-30

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Front air bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

NISSAN recommends that child re-

straints be installed in the rear seat.

However, if you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. Also, be sure the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated to indicate the passenger air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section for details.

The three-point seat belt in your vehicle

is equipped with an Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) which must be used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See

“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

A child restraint with a top tether strap

should not be used in the front passenger seat.

The instructions in this section apply to child restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seat or the front passenger seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-31

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0699

Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a front-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

WRS0680

Front facing – step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

1-32

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

LRS0667

Front facing – step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS0668

Front facing – step 5

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0681

Front facing – step 6

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-33

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0698

Front facing – step 7

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See “Top tether strap child restraint” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap to seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

8. Before placing the child in the child restraint, hold the child restraint near the seat belt path and use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to another seating position and try again, or try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the ALR mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 9.

WRS0475

Front facing – step 11

11. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, push the ignition switch to the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated see

9Front passenger air bag and status light

9 in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

1-34

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

LRS0669

Rear-facing – step 3

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-35

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

LRS0670

Rear-facing – step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 5

5. Remove any additional slack from the child restraint; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

WRS0763

Rear-facing – step 6

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint, hold the child restraint near the seat belt path and use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to another rear seating position and try again, or try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-36

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

BOOSTER SEATS

7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the ALR mode.

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER

SEATS

ARS1098

WARNING

Infants and small children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle.

Failure to use a child restraint or booster seat can result in serious injury or death.

Infants and small children should never

be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.

NISSAN recommends that the booster

seat be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, see “Booster seat installation” in this section.

A booster seat must only be installed in

a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat belt with a booster seat can result in a serious injury in sudden stop or collision.

Improper use or improper installation

of a booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-37

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

Do not use towels, books, pillows or

other items in place of a booster seat.

Items such as these may move during normal driving or a collision and result in serious injury or death. Booster seats are designed to be used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are designed to properly route the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt over the strongest portions of a child’s body to provide the maximum protection during a collision.

Follow all of the booster seat manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a booster seat, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of booster seats in your vehicle.

If the booster seat and seat belt is not

used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-

tioned to fit the booster seat, but as upright as possible.

After placing the child in the booster

seat and fastening the seat belt, make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the abdomen.

Do not put the shoulder belt behind the

child or under the child’s arm. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, see “Booster seat installation” later in this section.

When your booster seat is not in use,

keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in a closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the booster seat.

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

1-38

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0813

● Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a low back booster seat s s is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a high back booster seat

2

should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

WRS0811

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that booster seats be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a booster seat in the front passenger seat, move the passenger’s seat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-39

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0699

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Rear center position

LRS0451 WRS0812

Rear outboard position

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. See

“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

1-40

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing.

LRS0454

Front passenger position

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in the “Three-point seat belt with retractor” earlier in this section.

WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, push the ignition switch to the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-41

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the following systems:

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

● Driver and passenger supplemental frontimpact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag

These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.

The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

1-42

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WARNING

The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

WRS0031

The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.

The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See “Front Passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-43

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

ARS1133 ARS1041

WARNING

Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

1-44

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-45

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

ARS1045 ARS1046

WARNING

Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for details.

1-46

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0101

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bags (if so equipped):

The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WARNING

The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

WARNING

When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

SSS0159 SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-47

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

Coupe

1-48

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0845

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

1.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag inflators

2.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bags

3.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules

4.

Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

5.

Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

6.

Crash zone sensor

7.

Seat belt buckle switches on driver’s and passenger’s side

8.

Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)

9.

Occupant classification system control unit

10. Seat belt with pretensioner

11. Side satellite sensor

Sedan

WRS0844

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-49

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.

the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the information provided by the occupant classification sensor. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section for further details. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.

The driver supplemental front–impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.

The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.

If you have any questions about your air bag system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage air bag inflators. It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag

Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

1-50

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0475

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light is located on the instrument panel above the radio controls. The light operates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is

OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions outlined in this section: The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-51

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the Automatic Locking

Retractor mode (child restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object being detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.

The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

1-52

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. However, if the seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status light will remain off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light , located in the meter and gauges area in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front air bag precautions

WARNING

Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

Do not place objects with sharp edges

on the seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such objects can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor). This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.

Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-53

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

Work on and around the front air bag

system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.

A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag systems

WRS0816

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the information, cau-

tions and warnings in this manual still ap-

ply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may

1-54

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact.

They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation.

The side air bags and curtain air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag..

Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Front seats)

WARNING

The pretensioners cannot be reused af-

ter activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-55

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

If the vehicle becomes involved in a

frontal collision but a pretensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunction with the front air bag system. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners. Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

Work around and on the pretensioner

system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.

If you need to dispose of a pretensioner

or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pretensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or

START position. In this case, the pretensioner may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

NISSAN dealer.

1-56

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

WRS0169

1.

SRS air bag warning labels

2.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag warning label

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

LRS0100

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits include the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition is in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bags, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-57

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.

Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a

NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the front air bags inflate, the activated pretensioners must also be replaced.

The air bag module and pretensioners should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.

The air bag module and pretensioners cannot be repaired.

The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected by a

NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle.

If you need to dispose of a supplemen-

tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag and pretensioner system disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN

Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

1-58

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

MEMO

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-59

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-10

Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . 2-17

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-30

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Traction Control System (TCS) off switch

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Storage pouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

HomeLink T universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . .2-49

Programming HomeLink

T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

Programming HomeLink T for Canadian customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Operating the HomeLink T universal transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Rolling code programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Reprogramming a single HomeLink T button . . . . . .2-52

If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1.

Vents (P. 4-10)

2.

Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-27)

WIC1258

3.

Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped)/Bluetooth

T hands-free phone system (if so equipped)

(P. 4-44, P. 4-46, P. 4-60)

4.

Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

2-2

Instruments and controls

5.

Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-42, P. 2-33)

6.

Cruise control main/set switch

(P. 5-17)

7.

Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-26)

8.

Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-6)

9.

Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-32)

10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-51)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

12. Glove box (P. 2-39)

13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)

14. Heater and air conditioner (manual or automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-18)

15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-10)

16. Audio system controls (P. 4-20)

17. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-20)

18. Vehicle information display controls

(P. 2-16)

19. Hood release (P. 3-16)

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

20. Traction Control System (TCS) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-23)

Trunk opener (P. 3-16)

Intelligent Key port (P. 5-6)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

METERS AND GAUGES

1.

Tachometer

2.

Speedometer

3.

Fuel gauge

4.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

5.

Odometer/twin trip odometer

6.

Twin trip odometer change button

7.

Vehicle information display

8.

Instrument brightness control

WIC1259

Instruments and controls

2-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

LIC1352

1.

Speedometer

2.

Vehicle information display

3.

Change button

SPEEDOMETER

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

2-4

Instruments and controls

WIC1261

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the display as follows:

Trip

→ Trip → Trip

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

LIC1058

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into the red zone s

.

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LIC1059

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range s when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine.

See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section for immediate action required.

LIC1060

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers E (Empty).

Instruments and controls

2-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this section.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the button as described in the chart below to activate various features of the automatic antiglare rearview mirror.

Push and hold the button for about:

1 second

5 seconds

Feature:

(Push button again for about 1 second to change settings)

Compass display toggles on/off

Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings

Compass enters calibration mode 9 seconds

For information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

LIC0583

Push the button for about 1 second when the ignition switch is in the ON position to toggle the compass display s on or off. The display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

2-6

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the button when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The direction will be displayed.

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:

1. Establish your location on the zone map.

Refer to the illustration. Record your zone number.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

3. Push the MODE button in for 5 seconds until the current zone entry number and the

“VAR” icon is displayed.

4. Press the MODE button repeatedly until the desired zone entry number is displayed.

Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop pressing the MODE button and the display will show compass direction within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Instruments and controls

2-7

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

2-8

Instruments and controls

If a magnet is located near the com-

pass or the vehicle is driven where the terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the compass display may not indicate the correct direction.

In places where the terrestrial magne-

tism is disturbed, the correction of the direction starts automatically.

Inaccurate compass direction:

The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct direction is not shown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and hold the switch for about 9 seconds. The display will read “C.”

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles the display should return to normal.

● If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized

NISSAN dealer.

WIC0355

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

● The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Instruments and controls

2-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

Brake warning light or

Charge warning light

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) check warning light (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light

Intelligent Key system warning light

Low tire pressure warning light

Master warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime

Supplemental air bag warning light

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator light (if so equipped)

Front passenger air bag status light

High beam indicator light (Blue)

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Security indicator light

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Traction Control System off indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light (if so equipped)

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and push the ignition button to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go off: or , , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warning light

When you push the push-button ignition switch to the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off.

This indicates the ABS is operational.

2-10

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See

9Brake system9 in the 9Starting and driving9 section.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.

Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the drive belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the drive belt is loose, broken or missing.

Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) check warning light (if so equipped)

When the push-button ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for about

2 seconds. If the light comes on at any other time, it may indicate the CVT system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

Instruments and controls

2-11

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Intelligent Key system warning light

The Intelligent Key system warning light warns of a malfunction with the electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent Key system.

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off.

If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may not be possible to free the steering lock or to start the engine. If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible.

See “Intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

2-12

Instruments and controls

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and in the “In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch in the ON position, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF.

If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.

If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Master warning light

This light comes on when various vehicle information display warnings appear.

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the push-button ignition switch is pushed to the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For

7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning light

When the ignition switch is pushed to ONor

START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Instruments and controls

2-13

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly. For additional details see “Supplemental restraint system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems (if so equipped) and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) position indicator light (if so equipped)

When the push-button ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this indicator light shows the transmission selector lever position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Front passenger air bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light ( will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

)

OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons

(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in one of two ways:

● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

2-14

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch is in the

OFF, LOCK or ACC position.

The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.

For additional information, see “Security systems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light will blink when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when you push the push-button ignition switch to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on or does not go off, have the Traction

Control System checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Traction Control System off indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the traction control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the Traction Control System is not operating.

Push the traction control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See “Traction Control System (TCS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The traction control light also comes on when you push the push-button ignition switch to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the Traction Control System (TCS) is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving, have the Traction Control System checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Traction Control System is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle

Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.

This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control is not operating.

Instruments and controls

2-15

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on when you push the push-button ignition switch to the ON position. The light will turn off after about

2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving, have the Vehicle

Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or

OFF position or pushed to the OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position, and take the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.

WIC1102

The vehicle information display items as: s is located on the bottom of the speedometer. It displays such

● cruise control system information

● Intelligent Key operation information

● some indicators and warnings

● other information

For details about the Intelligent Key system, see

“Intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

2-16

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LIC1103

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

Press the button, located on the instrument panel just behind the steering wheel, to display the following modes:

MPG

→ MPG/MPH → Time/Miles → Range →

Exterior Temperature → Setting → Warning

LIC1093

Fuel Economy mode

The fuel economy mode can be selected to display the instant fuel economy since the last reset.

LIC1097

Average speed mode

The average speed mode can be selected to display the average miles per gallon and miles per hour since the last reset.

Instruments and controls

2-17

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WIC1266

Time/Miles (km)

The time/miles (km) mode can be selected to show the time and distance driven since the last reset.

LIC1095

Range mode

The range mode can be selected to give you an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The range is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

LIC1096

Exterior Temperature mode

The exterior temperature mode can be selected to provide you with the temperature outside of your vehicle.

2-18

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LIC1043

Setting mode

The setting mode allows you to set reminders or preferences for alerts, maintenance intervals or language displays.

to move In the setting mode screen press to:

● Alert

● Maintenance

● Display and press to select the menu.

LIC1044

Alert mode

The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying of time to rest or icy conditions.

The time to rest alert lets you know when you have been traveling for a long time and may need a break.

The icy alert notifies you that icy driving conditions may exist.

LIC1046

Reset mode

The reset mode can be selected in any screen that allows for preferences to be programmed.

Once the screen is selected, you have the option to reset their selected distances or time to a new setting.

Instruments and controls

2-19

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LIC1045

Maintenance mode

The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the following:

● engine oil

● oil filter

● tires

● other

Set a desired interval by pushing light the maintenance field and pressing enter the desired distance.

to high-

The reset mode will open up and allow you to

.

2-20

Instruments and controls

LIC1047

Display mode

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressing .

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG

Metric — km, °C, L/100 km

You can select the language and unit using the button and pressing .

The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button.

LIC1098

Warning mode

The warning mode can be selected to view any warnings that may be present. Once the screen is selected you have the option of skipping the warning or viewing it in detail.

Warnings can be present for issues such as an open door or low fuel. For more information about potential warnings see “Vehicle Information Display indicator lights and warnings” later in this section.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Vehicle information display warnings and indicators

1. Door and trunk open warning

2. Push warning

3. Low fuel warning

4. Low windshield washer fluid warning

5. No key warning

6. Parking brake indicator

7. Shift P warning

WIC1275

8. Cruise main switch indicator

9. Cruise set switch indicator

10. Engine start operation indicator (CVT models)

Instruments and controls

2-21

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/12/08—debbie

X

11. Engine start operation indicator (MT models)

12. Intelligent Key insertion indicator

13. Intelligent Key removal indicator

14. Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator

15. Steering lock release malfunction indicator

Door and trunk open warning

This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk has been opened when the engine is running.

Push warning (CVT models)

After the Shift P warning illuminates, the Push warning will illuminate if the ignition switch in the

ACC position when the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

See “Shift P warning” in this section for additional information.

To turn off the Push warning, push the ignition switch to the ON position and then to the LOCK position.

Low fuel warning

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-

2-22

Instruments and controls serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low windshield washer fluid warning

This warning illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

No key warning (Intelligent Key model)

This warning illuminates following two conditions:

1. When the ignition switch is pushed and the

Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system. If this warning illuminates, you cannot start the engine.

Check for the following causes and perform the assigned remedies:

– The battery of the Intelligent Key carried with you is discharged completely. Replace the battery with a new one.

– The Intelligent Key carried with you is not registered to the system. Use the registered Intelligent Key.

– You do not have an Intelligent Key with you. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.

2. When the door is closed with the Intelligent

Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. A chime will also sound.

Parking brake warning

This warning illuminates when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.

SHIFT P warning (CVT models)

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever in any position except in the P (Park) position.

If this warning illuminates, the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Move the selector lever to the P

(Park) position or push the ignition switch to the

ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.

If the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position, the Push warning will appear. Refer to

“Push warning” in this section.

For additional information about Intelligent Key, see “Intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Cruise main switch indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The indicator turns off when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator illuminates, the cruise control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Engine start operation indicator (CVT models)

This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position with the selector lever in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed.

Engine start operation indicator (MT models)

This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position with the manual transmission gear selector lever in neutral and the parking brake on.

This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the push-button ignition switch with the clutch and the brake pedal depressed.

Intelligent Key insertion indicator

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.

(For example, the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.)

If this indicator illuminates, insert the Intelligent

Key into the Intelligent Keys port in the correct direction. See “Push-button ignition switch” in the “Starting and driving” section.

Intelligent Key removal indicator

This indicator illuminates when the driver’s door is opened with ignition switch in the OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the Intelligent

Key port. A key reminder chime also sounds.

If this indicator illuminates, remove the Intelligent

Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator

(Intelligent Key model)

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. See “Intelligent Key battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Steering lock release malfunction indicator

This indicator illuminates when the steering wheel cannot be released from the LOCK position.

If this indicator illuminates, push the push-button ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.

Instruments and controls

2-23

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

SECURITY SYSTEMS

LIC0301

Your vehicle may have two types of security systems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the

Intelligent Key, door handle request switch, power door lock switch or mechanical key.

4. Confirm that the security indicator light comes on. The security light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase. The security light begins to flash once every

3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is pushed to ACC or ON, the system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all the doors, hood and trunk lid locked with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. When pushing the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, the system will be released.

2-24

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening the door or trunk lid without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s door or the trunk lid with the key, or by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC

Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-

SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD

VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-

ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

LIC0474

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

Instruments and controls

2-25

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

LIC1061

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer switch operates when the ignition key is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

Intermittent — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the switch toward s s

(Slower) or

B

(Faster). Also, for vehicles equipped with speed dependent wipers, the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)

2-26

Instruments and controls

s s

Low — continuous low speed operation

High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up tion of the wiper.

to have one sweep opera-

Pull the lever toward you s to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the reser-

voir tank is empty.

Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

WIC1126

Type A

To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

LIC1218

Type B

NOTE:

The top few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped)

WARNING

c

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer.

Xenon headlights provide considerably

more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

Instruments and controls

2-27

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

The life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals

(for example, when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on.

This way the life of the xenon headlights is not reduced.

If the xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become reddish. If one or more of the above signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer.

LIC1085

Type A

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

When turning the switch to the position, the front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights come on.

When turning the switch to the position, the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on.

LIC1064

Type B

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

2-28

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Type C

LIC1063

Autolight system (if so equipped)

LIC1086

The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you turn the key to OFF and all doors are closed.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position s

.

2. Push the push-button ignition switch to the

ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the push-button ignition switch is pushed OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, , or position.

Instruments and controls

2-29

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LIC1068

Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located on the top side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC1087

Headlight beam select

To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on and the light illuminates.

Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s s

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the

OFF position or in the headlight switch to the position. Turn the position for full illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is pushed off.

2-30

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC1066

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument cluster illuminates when the ignition switch is in ON position.

The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the

AUTO, or position.

Turn the control left or right to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights when driving at night.

The instrument brightness control will not adjust the brightness when the headlights or parking lights are off.

LIC1088

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

Instruments and controls

2-31

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

LIC1089

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the switch to the position, then turn the fog light position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

2-32

Instruments and controls

LIC0394

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)

LIC1069

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

LIC1041

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if so equipped). The switches are located on the center console.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the low or high position of the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

CAUTION

Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the seat.

Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.

If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is not running.

Instruments and controls

2-33

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)

OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

POWER OUTLET

LIC0451

The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Control System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.

The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the TCS off.

To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.

The indicator will come on.

Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system. See “Traction

Control System (TCS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.

2-34

Instruments and controls

WIC0534

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.

LIC1070

Instrument panel Type A (if so equipped)

The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The console outlet is powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LIC1071

Instrument panel Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION

The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. See your NISSAN dealer for additional information.

Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.

Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water to contact the outlet.

Do not leave devices plugged in the

outlet for an extended period of time because the constant supply of power will drain the battery

WIC1262

Console box

Open the lower half of the console box to access the power outlet. Refer to “Console box” in this section.

Instruments and controls

2-35

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

STORAGE

MAP POCKETS

2-36

Instruments and controls

WIC1263 LIC0016

SEATBACK POCKETS

The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

LIC1242

STORAGE POUCH

A storage pouch is located on the front of the driver’s and passenger’s seats.

WARNING

Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objects or objects that cannot fully fit inside the pouch because they might increase the likelihood of an injury in a crash.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LIC1074

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

Front - Type A

LIC1075

Instruments and controls

2-37

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Front - Type B

LIC1105

Rear (sedan)

WRS0167 LIC1219

Rear (coupe)

CUP HOLDERS

To open the front cup holders, push the cup holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and push down until it clicks in place.

The plastic insert (if so equipped) may be removed to accommodate a larger cup size or for cleaning.

The rear center cup holders are located in the rear fold-down armrest (sedan) or in the rear arm rest (coupe).

2-38

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CAUTION

Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

WIC1216

Soft bottle holder

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.

Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

WIC1076

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the master key when locking glove box.

s or unlocking s the

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Instruments and controls

2-39

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CONSOLE BOX

WIC1120

Upper half

Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the upper half of the console box. The mat (if so equipped) may be removed for cleaning.

The upper half of the console box may be used for storage of cellular phones. An access hole is provided at the front of the upper half of the console box for phone cord routing to the power outlet.

WIC1121

Lower half

Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the lower half of the console box. A power outlet is located inside the console box. The mat (if so equipped) may be removed for cleaning.

2-40

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Type A

COVERED STORAGE BOX

Push the center of the lid to open.

LIC1090

Type B

LIC1078

LIC0748

GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)

The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and can be used to hang a standard size plastic grocery bag.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than

20 lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

Instruments and controls

2-41

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WINDOWS

WIC1264

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while the vehicle is in motion.

LIC0802

To install the cargo net, attach the net to the retainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the cargo net retainers.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.

Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

2-42

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WIC1124

1.

Window lock button

2.

Power door lock switch

3.

Front passenger side (automatic switch, if so equipped)

4.

Right rear passenger side (sedan only)

5.

Left rear passenger side (sedan only)

6.

Driver side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached.

WIC1265

Front passenger’s power window switch

The passenger’s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open the window, push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached s s

. To close the window, pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached

2

.

Instruments and controls

2-43

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LIC0718

Rear power window switch (sedan only)

The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down close the window, pull the switch up s

.

s

. To

Locking passenger’s windows

When the window lock button is depressed, only the driver’s side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

LIC0410

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down (only driver’s side shown) to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. To stop the window, press the switch down while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse function

If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

The auto-reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

When power window switch does not operate

If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system.

2-44

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed.

4. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete. The power window automatically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up function was selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows.

If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure, see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

LIC1351

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The automatic moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or

OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open the moonroof, push the switch toward s

.

To fully close the moonroof, push the switch toward s

.

To open or close the moonroof part way, push the switch in any direction while the moonroof is sliding to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the moonroof

Close the moonroof by pushing the switch toward moonroof up.

s

. Release the switch, then push the switch toward s again to tilt the

To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch toward s

.

WARNING

In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child restraints.

Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

Instruments and controls

2-45

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CAUTION

Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Resetting the moonroof switch

The moonroof switch may not operate properly and need to be reset if any of the following conditions have occurred:

● the moonroof has been manually moved,

● the moonroof motor has been removed and reinstalled after the moonroof has been repositioned or adjusted,

● the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted or changed, or

● the electrical supply interrupted and/or some malfunction has been detected.

Use the following reset procedure to return moonroof operation to normal.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Push and hold the moonroof switch toward s s

. Once the moonroof has reached the full tilt position, release the switch. Push and hold the switch toward the

2

position again. After a delay of four seconds, the moonroof will make a small movement and backup.

3. Release the switch.

4. Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch, push and continuously hold the switch toward s

. The moonroof will move from the tilt position to the open position and back to the close position.

NOTE:

If the switch is released at any time during

Step 4, the procedure must be restarted.

5. Release the switch. Do not push the ignition switch to the OFF position for at least 2 seconds. The moonroof is now reset.

If the moonroof still does not operate properly, have the moonroof system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof.

2-46

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

INTERIOR LIGHT

LIC1081

Type A

The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.

● When the switch is in the ON position s the interior light illuminates, regardless of door position. The light will go off after

30 minutes unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

,

● When the switch is in the center DOOR position ditions: s

, the front and rear personal lights will illuminate under the following con-

WIC1267

Type B

– Driver’s door is opened.

Lights remain on for a maximum of

30 seconds after driver’s door is closed.

The lights will go off when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or the driver’s door is closed and locked.

The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when the doors are open.

● When the switch is in the OFF position less of door position.

s the interior light does not illuminate, regard-

,

NOTE:

The doorstep lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after 30 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

Instruments and controls

2-47

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Front map lamps

LIC1080

MAP LIGHTS

To turn the map lights on, press the light lens. To turn them off, press the lens again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC1083

Rear map lamps (sedan only)

To turn the rear map lights on, press the switch.

To turn them off, press the switch again.

2-48

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

TRUNK LIGHT

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.

When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

HOMELINK

T UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The HomeLink

T Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink T Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink

T will retain all programming.

Once the HomeLink

T Universal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures

(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink

T Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes. For additional information refer to “Programming HomeLink

T” later in this section.

WARNING

Do not use the HomeLinkT Universal

Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLink

T

Universal Transceiver.

Instruments and controls

2-49

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK T

WIC0986

1. To begin, press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

T buttons (to clear the memory) until the indicator light s blinks (after

20 seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter

1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink T surface.

WIC0987

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink

T button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink

T flashes, changing from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.

When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming.

To activate the garage door or other programmed device, press and hold the programmed HomeLink

T button — releasing when the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink T blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,

HomeLink

T has picked up a “rolling code” garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the

HomeLink

T to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another person for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” program button located on the garage door opener’s motor to activate the “training mode”. This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button.

2-50

Instruments and controls

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door opener’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.

Use the help of a second person for convenience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releasing the garage door opener program button, quickly and firmly press and release the

HomeLink T button you’ve just programmed.

Press and release the HomeLink T button up to 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink T button should now be programmed. (To program the remaining

HomeLink

T buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to

“clear” all previously programmed

HomeLink

T buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink

T buttons, refer to the HomeLink

T web site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK T FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required handheld transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to

HomeLink T, continue to press and hold the

HomeLink

T button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Programming HomeLink

T”) while you press and repress (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every

2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly

(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener, etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK

T

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink T Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed HomeLink T Universal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink

T does not quickly learn the handheld transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink T surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLinkT and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 -

3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink T surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If

HomeLink

T is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position – keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual.

Instruments and controls

2-51

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING

Rolling code garage door openers (or other rolling code devices) which are “code protected” and manufactured after 1996, may be determined by the following:

● Reference the garage door opener Owner’s

Manual for verification.

● The hand-held transmitter appears to program the HomeLink

T Universal Transceiver but does not activate the garage door.

● Press and hold the trained HomeLinkT button. If the garage door opener has the rolling code feature, the HomeLink T indicator light will flash rapidly, then remain on after 2 seconds.

To program the HomeLink T Universal Transceiver to a garage door opener with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming HomeLink

T” (the aid of a second person may make the following procedures quicker and easier).

2-52

Instruments and controls

1. Locate the training button on the garage door opener motor unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the training button, reference the garage door opener Owner’s Manual.

2. Press the training button on the garage door opener motor unit (which may activate a training light).

NOTE:

Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3.

3. Firmly press and release the programmed

HomeLink

T button a second time to complete the training process. (Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training.)

The garage door opener should now recognize the HomeLink

T Universal Transceiver and activate when the HomeLink

T button is pressed. The remaining two buttons may now be programmed

(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through

4 in the “Programming HomeLink T” procedures earlier in this section).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK

T BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink

T Universal Transceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

T button. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 -

76 mm) away from the HomeLink T surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

4. The HomeLink T indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.

The HomeLink T Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink

T button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink T buttons.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink T. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink

T Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690

Instruments and controls

2-53

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

MEMO

2-54

Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Intelligent Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Child safety rear door lock (Sedan only). . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Intelligent Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Tilting telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Telescopic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

KEYS

WPD0363

1.

Two Intelligent Keys

2.

Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)

3.

Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEYS

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with

3-2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it.

CAUTION

Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

DOORS

SPA1951

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors, trunk lid, glove box and rear seatback lock.

See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” later in this section,

“Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below.

1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF position.

2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats with the mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you.

See “Trunk lid” later in this section, “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” section and

“Seats” in the “Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.

WARNING

Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.

Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WPD0444

Driver’s side

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front locks all doors.

of the vehicle

Turning the key one time toward the rear s s s of the vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral

3

(where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors

4

.

3-4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Opening and closing windows (if so equipped)

The driver’s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with automatic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is unlocked.

WPD0291

Inside lock

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position door.

s

, then close the

To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position s

.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WPD0381

Door lock switch

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to the lock position vehicle.

s

. When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to the unlock position s

.

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any door open, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed.

LIC0716

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

(Sedan only)

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position inside.

s

, the door can be opened from the outside or the

When the lever is in the lock position side.

s

the door can be opened only from the out-

,

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.

Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions.

3-6

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.

● When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port to start the engine. Replace the discharged battery with a new one as soon as possible. For more details, see “Push-button ignition switch” in the “Starting and driving” section.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a battery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.

Because the steering wheel is locked electrically, unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Unlocking the steering wheel is impossible even if the Intelligent Key is inserted into the Intelligent

Key port. Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent

Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CAUTION

Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Coupe shown Sedan similar

LPD0450

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch s

.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-7

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch s

.

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

3-8

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WPD0375

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the key with you and then lock the doors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WPD0432

Coupe shown, Sedan similar

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch within the range of operation.

WPD0433

Coupe shown, Sedan similar

Locking doors

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position, push the ignition switch to the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

s

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice.

WPD0369

NOTE:

● Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the

LOCK position.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handle or the trunk opener switch.

When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.

The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door.

Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:

When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the rear parcel shelf.

When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

When the Intelligent Key is placed on or

under the spare tire area.

When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

WPD0432

Coupe shown, Sedan similar

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch s

.

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch s again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.

3-10

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WPD0369

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within

1 minute after pushing the request switch.

● Opening any door.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the following operations.

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.

WPD0406

Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch ligent Key with you.

s for more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-11

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range.

● When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

WPD0359

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push the

Key.

button on the Intelligent

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles.

3-12

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WPD0360

Unlocking doors

1. Push the button on the Intelligent Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Push the button again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within

1 minute after pushing the button.

● Opening any doors.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting for

15 seconds by performing one of the following operations.

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.

Opening windows (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simultaneously.

● To open the windows, press the button on the Intelligent Key longer than

3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing the button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key.

WPD0364

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the button for longer than 0.5 second to open the trunk lid. The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the

ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel switch” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-13

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WPD0361

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pushing and holding the button on the

Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for

25 seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key.

Silencing the horn beep feature

WPD0362

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the

Intelligent Key.

See the troubleshooting guide that follows and

“Vehicle information display indicator lights and warnings” in the “Instruments and controls” section.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent

Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.

3-14

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine

Symptom

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

When opening the driver’s door to get out of the vehicle

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

When pushing the door handle request switch to lock the door

When closing the trunk lid

The selector lever is not in the P (Park) position.

Possible Cause

The inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key port.

The NO KEY warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

The NO KEY warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The outside chime sounds for approximately

3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

The outside chime sounds for approximately

2 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position and the selector lever is not in the P (Park) position.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or trunk.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or trunk.

A door is not closed securely.

The door handle request switch is pushed before the door is closed.

The outside chime sounds for approximately

10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.

Remedy

Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Close the door securely.

Push the door handle request switch after the door is closed.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-15

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

HOOD TRUNK LID

WPD0441

Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver’s side instrument panel; the hood springs up slightly.

Lift the lever at the front of the hood with your fingertips and raise the hood.

Remove the support rod from the clamp.

s s

Insert the support rod into the hole on the passenger’s side of the hood.

When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower the hood to approximately 12 inches above the latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.

3-16

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.

If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD0394

OPENER OPERATION

WARNING

Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

To open the trunk lid, push the opener lever down.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

NOTE:

You can open the trunk lid with the Intelligent Key. Refer to “Intelligent Key system” earlier in this section.

LPD0395

Cancel switch

When the switch, located inside the glove box, is in the OFF position, the power to the trunk lid will be cancelled. The trunk can only be opened with the master key or keyfob.

The trunk lid cannot be opened when:

● using the trunk lid release switch,

● the trunk open request switch is pressed, when the Intelligent Key is in range of the vehicle or

● the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key is pushed.

LPD0396

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-17

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

LPD0397

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located on the floor to the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuelfiller door, pull up the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

WPD0434

Coupe shown, sedan similar

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap to the left to remove. To tighten, turn the cap to the right until ratcheting clicks are heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder refueling.

while

3-18

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WARNING

Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and Controls” section earlier in this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-19

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING

COLUMN

LPD0398

TILT OPERATION

Pull the lever s s all the way towards you and adjust the steering wheel up or down in direction

2

to the desired position. Lock the wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its original position.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

TELESCOPIC OPERATION

Pull the lever s s all the way towards you and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in direction

3

, to the desired position. Lock the wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its original position.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

SUN VISORS

WPD0435

Coupe shown, sedan similar

To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor.

To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount and swing the sun visor to the side.

3-20

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

MIRRORS

Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped) in or out as needed.

CAUTION

Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position.

Coupe shown, sedan similar

VANITY MIRRORS

LPD0389

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open.

WPD0126

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The night position s reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position hours.

when driving in daylight

WARNING

Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-21

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WPD0333

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The indicator light s will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press the button. The indicator light will turn off.

3-22

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press the button again. The indicator light will turn on.

For information on HomeLink

T Universal Transceiver operation, see “HomeLink T Universal

Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

For information on the compass and outside temperature display, see “Compass and outside temperature display” in the “Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors

s

or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

LPD0346

Electric control type

The outside mirror remote control only operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or left mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by moving the control lever.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the

“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3-23

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

How to use the SETUP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Rearview monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Heater and air conditioner (manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-13

Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player. . . . . . 4-27

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Bluetooth T Hands-Free Phone System without

Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50

List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

Bluetooth T Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Phone download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

Making a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65

Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66

Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67

Nissan Voice Recognition System (if so equipped) . . . 4-69

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69

System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Bluetooth

T Hands-Free Phone System voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70

Navigation system voice commands

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Voice recognition settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WARNING

Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.

Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock.

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if so equipped)

1.

brightness control button (P.

4-7)

2.

TILT button*

3.

INFO button*

4.

SETUP button (P. 4-3)

5.

MAP button*

4-2

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA0746

6.

DEST button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

SETUP button — This is a button on the control panel.

“Display” key — This is a select key on the touchscreen. By touching this key you can proceed to the next function.

SETTING UP THE START-UP

SCREEN

With the ignition to ACC or ON, the SYSTEM

START-UP warning is displayed on the screen.

Read the warning and touch the “I agree” key

(English) or the “Enter” (Français) key.

If you do not touch the “I agree” key, the Navigation system will not proceed to the next step display.

If you do not press a button or touch a screen key for more than 1 minute on the START-UP screen, the screen will change to the audio screen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

LHA0747

HOW TO USE THE SETUP BUTTON

When the SETUP button is pressed, the settings screen will appear on the display. You can select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Touch one of the setting item keys to select each item to be set.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

● Press the button. The message “Resuming display” will appear and the Display

“ON” key will be automatically turned on, the amber indicator will illuminate.

LHA0748

Display settings

Touch the “Display” key. The display screen will appear.

Display/brightness/contrast:

Touch the “–” key or the “+” key to adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen.

The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by touching the “Back” key or pressing any other mode button.

LHA0749

Display off:

Touch the Display “ON” key. The indicator of the display turns off; touch the “Back” key to accept the change. The message above will be displayed briefly. When the audio, or any mode button on the control panel is operated, the display turns on for that operation. If one of the control panel buttons is pressed, the display will automatically turn off after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on,

● Press the SETUP button and then touch the display “ON” key, or

4-4

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LHA0750

Clock

Adjusting the time:

The following display will appear when pressing the SETUP button, then touching the “Clock” key.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned on, a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

To turn off the clock in the upper right corner of the screen touch the On-screen Clock “ON” key, touch it again to display the clock.

Clock Format:

Touch the key or the key to choose either the 12-hour clock display or the 24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Touch the “–” key or the “+” key to adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

When this item is turned on, the daylight saving time, application is enabled. To turn off daylight saving time, touch the Daylight Saving Time “ON” key; touch it again to enable daylight saving.

LHA1005

Time Zone:

Touch the “Time Zone” key, the Time Zone screen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending on the current location. Touch the “ON” key for the particular time zone.

● Pacific zone

● Mountain zone

● Central zone

● Eastern zone

● Atlantic zone

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

● Newfoundland zone

After selection, touch the “Back” key the Clock screen will appear.

Pacific zone has been set as the initial (default) setting.

LHA1006

Beep setting

Touch the “Volumes/Tones” key. Touch the Button Beeps “ON” key to turn on or turn off the beep sound. To accept the changes touch the “Back” key.

With this option on, a beep will sound if any button is pressed or any key is touched. The amber indicator will be illuminated.

LHA0751

Language/units

The following display will appear when pressing the SETUP button, then touching the

“Language/Units” key.

4-6

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LHA1007

Select Language:

Touch the “Select Language” key. From the following display, select the English “ON” key or the

Français “ON” key for your language preference.

LHA1008

Select Units:

Touch the “Select Units” key. From the following display, select the US “ON” key or the Metric

“ON” key for your units preference.

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG

Metric: — km, °C, L/100 km

The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by touching the “Back” key.

Phone settings

For information on the phone settings, see

“Bluetooth

T Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation (if so equipped)” later in this section.

Voice recognition settings

For information on the voice recognition settings, see “Voice Recognition System (if so equipped)” later in this section.

Audio settings

For information on the audio settings, see “Audio

System” later in this section.

Navigation settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding these settings.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press the button. Pressing the button again will change the display to the day night by touching the key or the or the display. Then, adjust the brightness key.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the display will return to the previous display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-7

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

When the shift selector lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the view directly to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

The rearview camera is a convenience

but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly.

Objects viewed in the rearview monitor

differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.

Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is installed beside the license plate light.

When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.

Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and distances to objects with reference to the bumper line s are displayed on the monitor.

LHA0437 s s s s

They are indicated as reference distances to objects. The lines and colors in the display indicate distances from the back bumper line the illustration.

s in

1.5 ft (0.5 m) red

3 ft (1 m) yellow

7 ft (2 m) green

10 ft (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider than the actual clearance.

4-8

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LHA1013

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

To adjust the quality of the screen, press the

SETUP button.

● To adjust the Brightness, Tint, Contrast, Display ON/OFF and Color of the rearview monitor, press the SETUP button with the rearview monitor on, then touch the “–” or

“+” key on the item and adjust the level.

● Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint and Color of the rearview monitor while the vehicle is moving.

OPERATING TIPS

● When the selector lever is shifted to R (Reverse), the monitor screen automatically changes to the rearview monitor mode.

However, the radio can be heard.

● It may take some time until the rearview monitor is displayed after the selector lever has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects may be distorted momentarily until the rearview monitor screen is displayed completely.

When the selector lever is returned to a position other than R (Reverse), it may take some time until the screen changes. Objects on the screen may be distorted until they are completely displayed.

● When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects. This is not a malfunction.

● When strong light directly enters the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.

● The colors of objects on the rearview monitor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object.

● When the contrast of objects is low at night, pressing the SETUP button may not change the brightness.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark place or at night.

● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the rearview monitor may not display objects. Clean the camera.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.

● Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

● Do not use body wax on the camera window.

Wipe off the wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

VENTILATORS

WHA0736

Right and Left

Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilator slides.

Open or close the ventilators by using the dial.

Move the dial toward the tilators or toward the to open the vento close them.

Center

WHA0737

Rear (if so equipped)

WHA0688

4-10

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual)

WARNING

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

1.

Fan speed control/system OFF dial

2.

Air flow control buttons

3.

Temperature control dial

4.

Air conditioner button

5.

Rear window defroster

6.

MAX A/C button

7.

Front window defrost button

8.

Air recirculation button

WHA0739

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets.

MAX

A/C

— Air flows from center and side vents with maximum cooling.

— Air flows from center and side ventilators.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-11

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

— Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

On position (Indicator light on):

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

Off position (Indicator light off):

Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

The button is provided only on vehicles equipped with an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the desired position and push the button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light comes on when the air conditioner is operating.

To turn off the air conditioner, push the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch

For more information about the rear window defroster switch, see “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF position for normal heating.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and center ventilators.

1. Press the

2. Press the button to the OFF position.

air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

4-12

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button .

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

● To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan control dial to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position.

● When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).

This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets.

1. Press the

2. Press the button to the OFF position.

air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

● When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).

This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if so equipped)

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the desired position, and push in the button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the

2. Press MAX A/C or button.

button to the OFF position.

air flow control

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Push the comes on.

button. the indicator light

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-13

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

● For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, push the button to the ON position. Be sure to return the to the OFF position for normal cooling. MAX

A/C may be used for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Push the comes on.

button. The indicator light

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

3. Press the comes on.

button. The indicator light

When the or are selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on (however, the indicator light will not illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Operating tips

● Keep the windows and moonroof closed while the air conditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

The air conditioning system should be

operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication.

4-14

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation

button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WHA0741 WHA1064

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-15

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

WHA0743

WHA0745

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-17

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic) (if so equipped)

1.

Driver temperature control dial

2.

Air flow control buttons

3.

Passenger temperature control dial

4.

DUAL button

5.

Rear defrost button

6.

Front window defrost button

7.

Fan speed dial/system OFF button

8.

Air recirculation button

9.

A/C ON/OFF button

10. AUTO button

WHA0774

WARNING

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

4-18

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Driver and passenger temperatures can be set independently. Press

DUAL or turn the passenger temperature control dial to the left or right to activate dual climate control functions. Turn the passenger’s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger’s temperature.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F

(24°C) for normal operation.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off are also controlled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the defroster control button to turn the system on. The indicator light in the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, turn the manual fan control to HI.

● As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode.

● When the control is activated, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C).

This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The air recirculation mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Turn the fan control dial manually control the fan speed.

left or right to

Press the off.

/OFF button to turn the system

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the switch will come on.

— Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press the /OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS

● When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF or mode.

Air flow control

Push the air flow control buttons to manually control air flow and select the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and side ventilators.

— Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-19

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

WHA0791

The sunload sensor, located on the top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON position, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system.

4-20

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi

(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within

25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a lineof-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

(usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so equipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM T satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-21

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD changer/player.

Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

LHA0099

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.

During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.

The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment temperature is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature before use.

4-22

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.

The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunction:

3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

CDs that are not round

CDs with a paper label

CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to record or burn CDs.

If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

1. MP3 or WMA file not supported

→ “UN-

PLAYABLE TRACK”

→ Go to next track

2. CD ROM → “No Audio Track” → Eject disc and go to the last mode (CD player only) /

Go to next disc (CD changer only)

3. TEMP/MECH ERROR

→ “PRESS EJECT”

4. READ/FOCUS ERROR → “CHECK DISC”

CHECK DISC:

Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up, etc.).

Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove the

CD by pressing the EJECT button. After a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t hear.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title line on the display.

* Windows

T and Windows MediaT are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United

States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-23

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

4-24

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Specification chart:

Supported media

Supported file systems

Supported versions*1

MP3

WMA

Version

Sampling frequency

Bit rate

Version

Sampling frequency

Bit rate

Tag information

Folder levels

Text character number limitation

Displayable character codes*2

CD, CD-R, CD-RW

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

8 kHz - 48 kHz

8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

32 kHz - 48 kHz

48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

128 characters

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:

UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-25

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom

Cannot play

Poor sound quality

It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips

Skipping with high bit rate files

Moves immediately to the next song when playing

Songs do not play back in the desired order

Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

4-26

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

1.

SEEK/TRACK button

2.

CD insert slot

3.

TUNE/FF·REW button

4.

CD eject button

5.

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BALANCE)

12. RADIO button

13. CD button

14. DISP button

15. PRESET A·B·C button

16. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

17.

pause/mute button

6.

CLOCK button

7.

AUX IN jack

8.

SCAN button

9.

RDM/RPT button

10. PWR/VOL control knob

11. AUX button

LHA0728

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER

For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” earlier in this section.

Audio main operation

PWR/VOL control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, then press the PWR/VOL control knob.

If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, place the ignition in the ACC position.

The mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.

Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turns the system off.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-27

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance)

DISP (display) button:

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as follows:

Bass

→ Treble → Fade → Balance → Beep

ON/OFF

→ Audio → Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance press the AUDIO button until the desired mode appears in

TUNE/FF·REW the display.

or

Press the to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade and

Balance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speaker.

Pressing the DISP (display) button will show text about CD information in the audio display.

If the text information is to long to fully be displayed on the screen; press and hold the DISP button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll through the rest of the text.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows: Track number and

Track time

→ Album title → Song title.

● Track number displays the track number selected on the disc.

To turn the Beep sound off or on, press the

AUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the

TUNE/FF·REW button or until the desired mode is displayed. This turns on or turns off the beep sound when audio buttons are pressed.

● Track time displays the amount of time the track has played.

● Album title displays the title of the CD being played.

● Song title displays the title of the selected

CD track.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button again to turn off the clock display.

4-28

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Clock set

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for approximately 2 seconds.

2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.

3. Press the SEEK/TRACK button or to adjust the hours.

4. Press or

TUNE/FF·REW to adjust the minutes.

button

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the clock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK button again to return to the regular clock display.

pause/mute button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, press the pause/mute button. Press the button again to resume the audio sound.

FM/AM radio operation

FM/AM band select:

Pressing the RADIO button will change the band as follows:

AM

←→ FM

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

When the RADIO button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during

FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FF·REW (tuning) button:

Press the TUNE/FF·REW button or for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold the tuning buttons down.

SEEK (tuning) button:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button or to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN (tuning) button:

Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the display window. Scan tuning begins from low to high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting station that has sufficient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period stops scan tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to the A, B and C preset button in any combination of AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change between storage banks. The radio displays the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of presets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual

TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side up. The compact disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns off and the last used compact disc starts to play.

TUNE/FF·REW (Fast Forward, Rewind) button:

When the TUNE/FF·REW button or is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button:

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

When is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginning.

Press several times to skip several tracks.

Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-29

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

vances 1 additional track. The track number appears in the display window. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is played.)

When is pressed, the track being played returns to the beginning. Press several times to skip back several tracks. Each time the button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track.

RDM/RPT button:

When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

Random Disc ←→ Repeat Track ←→ Normal

Random Disc: The order of the tracks on the disc will be mixed during play.

Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing will be repeated.

SCAN (CDs) button:

Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans through all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is pressed during scan mode.

CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected.

When the button is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

A CD icon indicator appears on the display when a CD is loaded with the system on.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The

AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

4-30

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

1.

SEEK/TRACK button

2.

CD insert slot

3.

TUNE/FF·REW button

4.

CD eject button

9.

RDM/RPT button

10. PWR/VOL control knob

11. AUX button

12. RADIO* button

13. CD button

14. DISP button

15. PRESET A·B·C button

16. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons

17.

CD load button

*No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active XM T satellite radio service subscription. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands.

LHA0729

Type A

5.

AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE,

SSV, BALANCE and BEEPS)

6.

CLOCK button

7.

AUX IN jack

8.

SCAN button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-31

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if so equipped)

No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active XM

T satellite radio service subscription. Satellite radio is not available in

Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands.

Audio main operation

AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade, SSV,

Balance and Beeps)

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as follows:

For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” earlier in this section.

PWR/VOL control knob

Bass

→ Treble → Fade → Spd Sen Vol → Balance

→ Beep ON/OFF → Audio → Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance press the AUDIO button until the desired mode appears in

TUNE/FF·REW the display.

or

Press the to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade and

Balance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speaker.

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, and then press the PWR/VOL control knob while the system is off to call up the mode

(radio or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

To turn the Beep sound off or on, press the

AUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the

TUNE/FF·REW button or until the desired mode is displayed. This turns on or turns off the beep sound when audio buttons are pressed.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL control knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume mode to

OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, press the

TUNE/FF·REW button.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-

4-32

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

wise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button again to turn off the clock display.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for approximately 2 seconds.

2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.

3. Press the SEEK/TRACK button or to adjust the hours.

4. Press or

TUNE/FF·REW to adjust the minutes.

button

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the clock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK button again to return to the regular clock display.

DISP (display) button:

Pressing the DISP (display) button will show text information about CD, MP3 and SAT (satellite, if so equipped) in the audio display.

If the text information is to long to fully be displayed on the screen; press and hold the DISP

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll through the rest of the text.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:

Track number and Track time

←→ Album title

←→ Song title.

● Track number displays the track number selected on the disc.

● Track time displays the amount of time the track has played.

● Album title displays the title of the CD being played.

● Song title displays the title of the selected

CD track.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to a

CD with MP3s and ID3 tags, press the DISP button. The DISP button will scroll through the

CD text as follows: Track number and Track time

←→ Folder title ←→ Album title ←→ Artist name

←→ Song title.

● Track time displays the amount of time the current track has been playing.

● Track number displays the number of the track playing on the selected disc.

● Folder title displays the title of the folder.

● Album title displays the title of the album of the song playing.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist of the song playing.

● Song title displays the title of the song playing.

Satellite radio display mode (if so equipped)

To change the text displayed when listening to satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP button. The DISP button will scroll through the broadcast information as follows: Channel number → Category name → Channel name → Artist name

→ Song title.

● Channel number displays the channel number of the selected satellite radio station.

● Category name displays the category name of the selected satellite radio station.

● Channel name displays the channel name the selected satellite radio station.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist, host or weather condition of the selected satellite radio station.

● Song title displays the song title, show name, or temperature of the selected satellite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO button will change the band as follows:

AM

←→ FM ←→ SAT (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active XM T satellite radio service subscription. Satellite radio is not available in

Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-33

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

TUNE/FF·REW (tuning) button:

Press the TUNE/FF·REW button or for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold the tuning buttons down.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual

TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pressed.)

SEEK (tuning) button:

3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.

Press the SEEK/TRACK button or to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

SCAN (tuning) button:

Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the display window. Scan tuning begins from low to high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting station that has sufficient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period stops scan tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations:

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or

SAT radio encoded within a regular radio broadcast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data.

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to the A, B and C preset button in any combination of AM or FM stations.

RDS can display:

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change between storage banks. The radio displays the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of presets are active.

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Classical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

4-34

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. To insert the disc, first press the button.

If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pressing the PWR button will start the compact disc.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs in the CD changer.

CD load button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the load button for less than 1.5 seconds.

Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the load button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

TUNE/FF·REW

(fast forward, rewind) button:

When the TUNE/FF·REW or button is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CD returns to normal play speed.

MP3 TUNE/FF·REW button:

While playing an MP3, press the

TUNE/FF·REW or button to scan forward or backward through available folders.

To fast forward or rewind through an MP3 audio track, press the TUNE/FF·REW or button for more than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the track following the present one starts to play from the beginning. Press several times to skip several tracks. Each time the button is pressed, the CD advances 1 additional track. The track number appears in the display window. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is played.)

Random Disc: The tracks on the current selected disc will be played randomly.

Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing will be repeated.

Repeat Track: The current track will be repeated.

*This mode is only available when multiple CDs are loaded into the CD changer.

MP3 RDM/RPT button:

When is pressed, the track being played returns to the beginning. Press several times to skip back several tracks. Each time the button is pressed, the CD moves back 1 track.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press a

CD select button (1 – 6).

RDM/RPT button:

When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while a compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

Random All Discs*

→ Random Disc → Repeat

Disc → Repeat Track → normal → Random All

Discs

When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while an

MP3 compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

Random All Discs*

→ Random Disc → Repeat

Disc → Random Folder → Repeat Folder →

Repeat Track → normal → Random All Discs

Random All Discs: The loaded discs will be played randomly, not in sequence of how they are loaded.

Random Disc: The tracks on the current selected disc will be played randomly.

Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing will be repeated.

Random Folder: The folders on the current MP3 disc will be played randomly.

Repeat Folder: The current folder being played will be repeated.

Repeat Track: The current track will be repeated.

Random All Discs: The loaded discs will be played randomly, not in sequence of how they are loaded.

*This mode is only available when multiple CDs are loaded into the CD changer.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-35

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

SCAN button:

1 Disc, All Tracks

While listening to a CD, press the SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track.

SCAN button for approximately 2 seconds, to preview the first 10 seconds of the first track in the first folder on the MP3 CDs loaded. Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the current loaded CD will remain playing.

CD Eject:

All Discs, 1 Track

Current/Selected disc:

While listening to a CD with other CDs loaded into the CD changer, press and hold the SCAN button for approximately 2 seconds, to preview the first 10 seconds of the first track on the CDs loaded. Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the current loaded CD will remain playing.

● Press the button, then press the slot number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The compact disc will be ejected. If no slot number (1 – 6) is pressed the current loaded disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload.

MP3 SCAN mode:

All discs:

1 Disc All Folders

While listening to an MP3 CD, press the SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track in each folder on the MP3 CD playing.

Pressing the SCAN button again during this

10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track and folder.

All Discs, 1 Track, 1 Folder

● Press and hold the button for more than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, or the button is pressed again during the eject sequence, the entire disc eject sequence will be canceled. When this button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played.

While listening to an MP3 CD with other CDs loaded into the CD changer, press and hold the

4-36

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CD IN indicator:

A CD icon indicator appears on the display when a CD is loaded with the system on.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The

AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Type B

1.

RADIO* button

2.

Touch-screen keys (vary depending on what function is selected)

3.

SEEK/TRACK button

4.

TUNE·FOLDER and AUDIO control knob (BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE,

FADE and SSV (if so equipped))

5.

Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons

6.

CD insert slot

7.

CD changer select (1 - 6) buttons

8.

CD eject button

9.

AUX jack

10. A·B·C button

11. ON·OFF/VOL control knob

12. CD/AUX button

*No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active XM

T satellite radio service subscription. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands.

LHA0730

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-37

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if so equipped)

Audio main operation

To turn the system off, press the ON·OFF/VOL control knob.

Turn the ON·OFF/VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” earlier in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active XM

T satellite radio service subscription. Satellite radio is not available in

Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands.

Reference symbols:

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Balance, Fade, and SSV):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as follows:

Bass

→ Treble → Balance → Fade → Audio →

Bass

RADIO button — This is a button on the radio. By pressing this button you can select the item or perform this action.

“Display” key — This is a select key on the touchscreen. By touching this key you can proceed to the next function.

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fade press the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust

Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers.

ON·OFF/VOL control:

Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, then press the ON·OFF/VOL control knob while the audio system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds.

4-38

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA0747

To change the SSV mode from 0 to 5, press the

SETUP button. Then touch the “Audio” key, the audio settings screen will be displayed. Touch the “–” or “+” key to change the SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by touching the corresponding key.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, touch the “Back” key repeatedly until the radio or the CD display reappears.

Clock set

For setting the clock, see “Adjusting the time” earlier in this section.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LHA1009

CD display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD certain text might be displayed (when CD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded the following text might be displayed during CD playback:

● Disc number displays which disc is playing

● Folder number displays the folder number on the CD that is being played.

● Track number displays the number of the track that is being played.

● Track time displays the amount of time the current track has been playing.

● Title displays the name of the song playing.

● Artist displays the name of the artist.

● Album displays the name of the album.

Satellite radio display

Some satellite stations might broadcast information that shows up in the display.

Depending on what the station decides to broadcast the following text might be displayed:

● Channel number displays the channel number of the selected satellite radio station.

● Category name displays the category name of the selected satellite radio station.

● Channel name displays the channel name of the selected satellite radio station.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist, host or weather condition of the selected satellite radio station.

● Song title displays the song title, show name, or temperature of the selected satellite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO button will change the band as follows:

AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT

When the RADIO button is pressed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

No satellite radio reception is available unless there is an active XM

T satellite radio service subscription. Satellite radio is not available in

Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not operational then pressing the RADIO button will switch between FM and AM bands.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE·FOLDER (tuning) knob:

To manually tune the radio, turn the

TUNE·FOLDER tuning knob to the right or left.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-39

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

SEEK/TRACK (tuning) button:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button or for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

“Scan” (tuning) key:

Touch the “Scan” key. SCAN illuminates in the display window. Scan tuning begins from low to high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting station that has sufficient signal strength. Touching the “Scan” key again during this 5 second period stops scan tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM or SAT

(Satellite if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C preset button in any combination of FM, AM or

SAT stations.

1. Press the A·B·C button or the “Preset” key to select preset channel A, B or C.

2. Press the RADIO button to select the desired FM, AM or SAT station band.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual tuning, seek tuning or scan tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory

(1 – 6) buttons until a beep sound is heard

(the station will now appear in one of the 1 –

6 keys on the screen)

4. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or

SAT radio encoded within a regular SAT broadcast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

4-40

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Music or programming type such as “Classical”, “Country” or “Rock”.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, press one of the CD changer (1 – 6) buttons. Once the CD slot has open insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pressing the

ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc.

Loading buttons:

1 Disc Load:

● Press one of the CD changer (1 – 6) select buttons for less than 1.5 seconds, then insert the CD.

● While in CD mode press one of the station and CD select (1 – 6) buttons on the radio, then insert the CD.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

● While in CD mode press one of the CD (1 –

6) keys on the screen, then insert the CD.

All Disc Load:

● Press and hold one of the CD changer (1 –

6) buttons for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer.

When one of the CD changer (1 – 6) buttons is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

CD/AUX button:

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

TUNE·FOLDER knob:

While playing an MP3 CD to skip through folders turn the TUNE·FOLDER knob right or left to skip forward or backward through the available folders.

This function will only operate on an MP3 CD with multiple folders.

“Folder” key:

ward or rewind. When the button is released, the

CD will return to normal play speed.

“Track” key:

While playing an MP3 CD you can select a track inside a folder. Touch the “Folder” key; a list screen displays. Touch one of the folder select keys; another list screen displays. Touch one of the file select keys; the system will start playing that track in the selected folder.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When the SEEK/TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Press several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed.

When the SEEK/TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning. Press several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed.

(When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.)

When pressing the SEEK/TRACK forward) or

(fast

(rewind) button for more than

1.5 seconds, the CD being played will fast for-

While playing a CD or an MP3 CD you can select a track or file on the disc. Touch the “Track” key, a list screen displays. Touch one of the track or file select keys, the system will start playing that track or file.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded:

● Touch one of the CD select (1–6) keys on the touch-screen or

● Press one of the station and CD select (1 –

6) buttons on the radio or

● Press one of the CD changer (1 – 6) select buttons.

“Scan” key:

While listening to a CD, touch the “Scan” key to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the current CD playing. Touching the “Scan” key during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-41

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

“Repeat” key:

When the “Repeat” key is touched while a compact disc is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

CD:

ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be played randomly.

1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently playing will be played randomly.

1 FOLDER RDM: Folders from that disc that is currently playing will be played randomly.

1 DISC RPT → 1 TRACK RPT

MP3 CD:

CD EJECT:

1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRACK

RPT

1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will be repeated.

1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing will be repeated

1 FOLDER RPT: The folder that is currently playing will be repeated.

“Random” key:

When the “Random” key is touched while a compact disc is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button. The loaded compact disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for more than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, or the button is pressed again during the eject sequence, the entire disc eject sequence will be canceled.

CD:

ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM

MP3 CD:

When this button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the next compact disc will be loaded. If no disc is loaded, the system will stay on the compact disc screen.

ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER

RDM

4-42

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located above the CD changer.

The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop computer.

Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

● A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA0049

CD CARE AND CLEANING

● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.

LHA0752

Type A

1.

Source select and Power on switch

2.

Tuning switch

3.

Volume control switch

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-43

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LHA0753

Type B

1.

Source select and Power on switch

2.

Tuning switch

3.

Volume control switch

LHA0754

Type C

1.

Source select and Power on switch

2.

Tuning switch

3.

Volume control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

POWER on switch

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio system on.

SOURCE select switch:

Push the SOURCE select switch to change the mode in the following sequence: PRESET A →

PRESET B → PRESET C → CD* → AUX** →

PRESET A

*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.

**This mode is only available when a compatible auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,

B or C), use the tuning switch or select one of the preset radio stations (1 – 6).

to

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,

B or C), push the tuning switch preset station in memory.

or for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the next

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station.

4-44

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for less than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track. Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the tuning switch or for more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up or down.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.

When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following precautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.

WARNING

A cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.

If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-45

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

BLUETOOTH

T HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

WARNING

Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth T

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have an approved Bluetooth T enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth T wireless technology, you can

4-46

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WHA1042 make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the invehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

module when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth T cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth

T Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module.

Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth T wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth T

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” later in this section. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-47

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH

t is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A. and licensed to

Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth T Phone

System.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice commands

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the amber light on the overhead console illuminates and the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the button is pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce “Hands-free phone system not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press and release the button located on the steering wheel. The light on the overhead console flashes to signal you have entered a voice recognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted.

4-48

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say “Help” and the system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the system announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Repeat the command in a clear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a response.

● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can also press the button on the steering wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep sounds to indicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, press the volume control switches

(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following rules and examples.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred, and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred.

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.

The system will prompt you to continue entering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (available when using the “Call International” command and the “Send” command during a call).

● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using the “Call International” command).

● Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available only when storing a phone book number).

● You can say “star”for “*”and “pound”for “#”at any time in any position of the phone number.

See “List of voice commands” and “International” later in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two star one two three”

LHA0757

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth T Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call.

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as single digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at any time. Please use the “Help” command to get information on how to use the system.

You can also use the button to skip through system feedback and to enter commands during a call. See “List of voice commands” and “During a call” later in this section for more information.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-49

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

PHONE/END

Press the button to cancel a VR session or end a call.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth T Hands-Free Phone

System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For additional command options, refer to “List of voice commands” later in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth

T Hands-Free

Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in

French). Use the following chart to select the language.

NOTE:

You must press the the change the language.

button or button within 5 seconds to

Current language

English

Spanish

French

Press

(PHONE/SEND) to select

Spanish

English

English

Press

(PHONE/END) to select

French

French

Spanish

1. Press and hold the than 5 seconds.

button for more

2. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a different language.”

3. Press the button.

5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After 5 seconds, the

VR session will end, and the language will not be changed.

For information on speaker adaptation, see

“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in this section.

4-50

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Setup” s

“Pair phone”

“New phone” s

Initiate from handset

Name phone

Assign priority s

Choose ringtone

1. Press the button on the steering wheel. The system announces the available commands.

2. Say: “Setup” s

. The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” s

. The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

4. Say: “New phone” s

. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate pairing from the phone handset s

.

The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on pairing NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter

“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code

“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for the phone s

.

If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name already used, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level s

. The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired

Bluetooth

T phone is in the vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to “Setup” later in this section for more information on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to select a custom ring tone s

. Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to

“Setup” later in this section for more information on selecting ringtones.

3. Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format s

. If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number, try entering the number in the following groups: 3-digit area code,

3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five” as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than

10 digits or any special characters, say “International”. See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section, for more information.

Making a call by entering a phone number

Main Menu

“Call” s

Number (speak digits)

“Dial”

4. When you have finished speaking the phone number, the system repeats it back and announces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” s

. The system acknowledges the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List of voice commands” later in this section.

1. Press the tone will sound.

button on steering wheel. A

2. Say: “Call” s

. The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the on the steering wheel.

Say: “Call International” to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

button

4-51

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel.

system is waiting for a response. The system will end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

For additional command options, see “List of voice commands” later in this section.

If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a response.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Memo Pad”

“Setup”

When you get used to the menus in the system, you can talk ahead by saying more than one command at a time. For example, say, “Call five five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”

“Call” or “Call International”

“Phone Book”

Also, when you get used to the system responses, you can skip ahead to the tone by pressing the button on the steering wheel.

However, if you press the end the VR session.

button when the system is waiting for a response from you it will

When you press and release the button on the steering wheel, you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu. The following pages describe these commands and the commands in each sub-menu.

“Call”

Remember to wait for the tone before speaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the

Main Menu

“Call” or “Call International”

Name (speak name) s

Number (speak digits)

“Redial” s

“Call Back”

4-52

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Name (speak name)

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you can dial a number associated with a name and location.

See “Phone book” later in this section to learn how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call. The system acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with the name, the system asks you to choose the location.

Once you have confirmed the name and location, the system begins the call.

Number (speak digits)

When prompted by the system, say the number you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers” and “Making a call by entering a phone number” earlier in this section for more details.

“Redial”

Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed within the vehicle.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last number dialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to redial” and ends the VR session.

“Call back”

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to call back” and ends the VR session.

International

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, please say “international”. When the system acknowledges the command, the system will prompt you to speak the number.

During a call

During a call there are several command options available. Press the mands.

button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-

● “Help” — The system announces the available commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system announces “Go back,” ends the VR session and returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns to the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers. The system then ends the VR session and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,

Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call command to transfer the call from the Bluetooth

T

Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call transferred to privacy mode.” The system then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call command again to return to a hands-free call through the vehicle.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute your voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset to “off” for the next call so the other party can hear your voice.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-53

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

“Phone book”

NOTE:

Phone book commands are not available when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phone Book”

“New Entry”

“Edit” s

“Delete” s

“List Names”

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each phone paired with the system. Each name can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“New entry”

Use the New Entry command to store a new name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name already stored, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and you confirm it is correct, the system asks for a location

(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”

See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset. The new contact phone

4-54

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth

T communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose

“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and number. The system then asks if you would like to store another location for the same name. If you do not wish to store another location, the system ends the VR session.

“Edit”

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name of the entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asks you for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.

” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset. The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth T communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and number, then announces that the entry has been stored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete”

Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book, all entries from the phone book, the current redial number or the current call back number.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Memo pad”

To delete entries from the phone book, say a name or “All entries” when prompted by the system.

The system acknowledges the command and asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call back number, say “redial number” or “call back number” when prompted by the system.

Main Menu

“Memo Pad”

“Record”

“Play” s

“Delete” s

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice memos, each up to 20 seconds long.

If a redial number or a call back number exists, the system deletes them without asking for confirmation.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying to delete, the system says so and ends the VR session.

“List names”

Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu.

“Record”

The system announces “Recording” and a tone sounds, signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.

When you are done, press the or button on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces

“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end the VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish to record over the oldest memo.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-55

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

“Play” “Pair phone”

The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR session.

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to the Bluetooth T Hands-Free Phone System.

NOTE:

If there are no memos recorded, the system announces “No messages to play.” The system ends the VR session.

“Delete”

The Delete command erases all memos. The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos.

“Setup”

Main Menu

“Setup”

“Pair Phone”

“List Phone” s s

“Select Phone”

“Delete Phone” s

“Change Priority” s s

“Select Ringtone”

“Bluetooth Off” s s

Use the Setup command to change options associated with the Bluetooth

T Hands-Free Phone

System.

The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled. Also, see

“Pairing procedure” earlier in this section for additional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a sixth phone, the system announces that you must first delete one phone or replace an existing phone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already been paired to your vehicle’s system, the system announces the name the phone is already using.

The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from the following commands:

● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone” earlier in this section.

● “Replace phone” — The system announces the names of the phones already paired and asks which you would like to replace.

4-56

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Once you say the name of the phone you wish to replace, the pairing procedure will begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in this section.

● “List phone” – See the description below.

“List phone”

Use the List Phone command to hear the names of the phones currently paired. If no phones are paired, the system announces, “No paired phones to list.” The system then ends the VR session.

“Select phone”

Use the Select Phone command to select a phone of lesser priority when two or more phones paired with Bluetooth T Hands-Free Phone System are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone and confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is turned OFF or you select a new phone.

“Change priority”

Use the Change Priority command to change the priority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth T phone is in the vehicle.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being used for another phone, the two phones will swap priority levels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone C and you change the priority level of Phone C to

Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone”

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth

T

Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phones already paired with the system and their priority level. The system then gives you the option to delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the list again.

Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones, the system asks you to confirm this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associated phone book for that phone will also be deleted.

“Select ringtone”

Use the Select Ringtone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received.

The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the following commands:

● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone. If you say “No”, the system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit.

● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone.

“Bluetooth off”

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the

Bluetooth T Hands-Free Phone System.

When the Bluetooth T Hands-Free Phone System is off, you will not be able to make or receive calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you will not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and access Setup.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-ofdialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will use memory A to store the model. If memory A is in use and memory B is available, the system will use memory B to store the model. If both of the memory locations are in use, the system will ask the user to select which memory location should be overwritten.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine running, the parking brake on, and the transmission in P (Park) (AT and CVT models) or N

(Neutral) (MT models).

3. Press and hold the than 5 seconds.

button for more

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-57

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

4. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END ( ) button to select a different language.”

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than

5 seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or

LOCK position.

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different language, see “Choosing a language” earlier in this section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory locations are already in use, the system will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow the instructions provided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name.

Follow the instructions to register your name.

11. The system will announce that speaker adaptation has been completed and the system is ready.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases. (The system will prompt you for each phrase.)

● phone book new entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● setup pair phone

● memo pad play

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phone book delete entry

● memo pad record

● dial star two one seven oh

● Yes

● No

● select ring tone

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

4-58

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● setup change priority

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● Cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● Home

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phone book list names

● call eight oh five four one

● Correction

● setup change ring tone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● setup main menu

● Delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● memo pad delete

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book.

Solution

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-59

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

BLUETOOTH

T HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

WARNING

Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth T

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have an approved Bluetooth T enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth T wireless technology, you can

4-60

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WHA1043 make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the invehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

module when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth T cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands, so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible. For more details, see

“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” later in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth

T Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module.

Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” later in this section. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

● The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones.

● Immediately after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROM for the navigation system is inserted into the player, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth

T wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth

T

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-61

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH

t is a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A. and licensed to

Xanavi Informatics

Corporation.

LHA0747

PAIRING PROCEDURE

1. Press the SETUP button, then touch the

“Phone” key.

2. Scroll to the bottom of the list and touch the

“Bluetooth Setup” key.

VOICE COMMANDS

3. Touch the “Pair Phone” key, then touch one of the “None (Add New)” keys.

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth T Hands-Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition

System” later in this section.

4. When a PIN code appears on the screen, operate the Bluetooth T cellular phone to enter the PIN code. The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone manufacturer. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for the details.

4-62

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WHA0788

5. When the pairing is completed, the screen will return to the Bluetooth T setup display.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LHA0760 LHA0761 LHA1010

PHONE DOWNLOAD

Up to 70 phone numbers can be stored in the phonebook.

1. Press the SETUP button, then touch the

“Phone” key.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Touch one of the “None (Add New)” keys from the name list of the phonebook.

4. Touch the “Bluetooth” key in order to transfer a phonebook entry from your cellular phone to your phonebook in your car.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-63

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LHA0762

5. Operate the cellular phone to send a person’s name and phone number from the memory of the cellular phone. The memory sending procedure from the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone manufacturer. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for more details.

LHA0763

6. If you want to add a voice tag, touch the

“Yes” key on the Add a voice tag? screen.

For example, if the partner’s name is David, speak “David” while the Store voice tag screen is on the display. The David voice tag is stored in the phonebook. Voice tag is a useful function for easy dialing supported by the voice recognition system. For more information, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition

System” later in this section.

7. When the phonebook download is completed, the screen will return to the name list of the phonebook.

LHA0764

There are different methods to input a phone number. Select one of the following options instead of the “Bluetooth” key in step 4 above.

Enter Data by Keypad:

Input the name and phone number manually.

Downloaded Phonebook:

Select an entry from a list of phone numbers you have already transferred from your phone to your vehicle.

Outgoing Calls:

Store the name and phone number from the outgoing call list.

4-64

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Incoming Calls:

Store the name and phone number from the incoming call list.

To delete an item, touch the “Delete item” key.

LHA0765

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below.

1. Press the phone button on the steering wheel switches. The phone screen will appear on the display.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Touch one of the downloaded person’s key from the list. Dialing will start.

4. After the call is over, perform one of the following to finish the call.

a. Touch the “Hang Up” key.

b. Press and hold the phone the steering wheel switches.

button on

There are different methods to make a call. Select one of the following options instead of the

“Phonebook” key in step 2 above.

Redial:

Dial the previously dialed number again.

Call Logs - Outgoing Calls:

Select the name and phone number from the outgoing call logs.

Call Logs - Incoming Calls:

Store the name and phone number from the outgoing call list.

Downloaded Phonebook:

Choose from a list of stored numbers that have been transferred from your phonebook to your vehicle.

Dial Keypad:

Input the phone number manually.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-65

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Hold Call:

Continue to hold call.

Reject Call:

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, follow one of the procedures listed below.

a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display.

b. Press and hold the phone steering wheel switches.

button on the

LHA0766

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display will change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow the two procedures listed below.

a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display.

b. Press the phone wheel switches.

button on the steering

There are some options available when receiving a call. Select one of the following displayed on the screen.

Answer:

Accept an incoming call to talk.

4-66

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA0767

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.

Select one of the following displayed on the screen if necessary.

Hang up:

Finish the call.

Handset:

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute:

Mute your voice to the person.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Enter Digit :

Brings up a keypad, enter digits when needed.

For example, entering your PIN number for voicemail.

Cancel Mute:

This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.

Mute will be cancelled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or quieter, press the volume control switch located on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone. This adjustment is also available in the SETUP mode.

LHA1010

PHONE SETTING

To set up the hands-free phone system to your preferred settings, press the SETUP button, then touch the “Phone” key on the display.

Phonebook:

See “Phonebook download” earlier in this section.

Downloaded Phonebook:

See the following information for each item.

WHA0788

Download All:

Transfer phonebook entries from your cellular phone to the vehicle’s phonebook. For more information, see “Phonebook download” earlier in this section.

Delete Downloaded Phonebook:

Delete all of the downloaded phonebook entries.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-67

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-

book:

Delete a single entry from the downloaded phonebook. Touch the corresponding letter key, then touch on the name key you wish to delete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete the entry.

Delete Call Logs:

Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from the list.

Phone Ringer Vol:

Adjust the ring volume to be quieter “–” or louder

“+”.

Phone Incoming Vol:

Adjust the phone incoming volume to be quieter

“–” or louder “+”.

Use Vehicle Ringtone:

If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is different from the cellular phone’s will sound when receiving a call.

LHA1011

Bluetooth Setup:

See the following information for each item.

Bluetooth Hands-Free:

If this item is turned off, the connection between the cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module will be canceled.

Paired Phone List:

Up to 5 registered cellular phones are shown on the list.

Pair Phone:

See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.

LHA1012

Priority Change

If multiple phones are registered to the system, you can change the priority of the phones on the shown list.

Remove Paired Phone:

Delete a registered cellular phone from the paired list.

Bluetooth Info.:

Check information about the device name, vehicle name, device address device PIN and connection status.

Edit Phone Name:

If you would like to change the way your phone’s name is displayed select this key, a character input screen will be displayed.

4-68

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the systems equipped on this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press the button located on the steering wheel.

Then speak the command for the system you wish to activate. The command given is picked up by the microphone, and it is performed when it is properly recognized. At this time NISSAN Voice

Recognition will provide a voice and message (in the center display) to inform you of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the button is pressed before the initialization completes, the display will show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands

LHA0768

● If you want to cancel the command, press the the button or press and hold button for 2 seconds during feedback. The system will announce: “Voice input is canceled”

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, press the volume control buttons

(

2 or +) on the steering wheel while being provided with the feedback.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.

1. Press the button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a command”

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon of the display changes, speak a command. For additional information, see “List of voice commands” later in this section.

4. Voice and message feedback will be provided when the command is accepted.

● If the command is not recognized, the system announces: “Please say again.” Repeat the command in a clear voice.

● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-69

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the following systems:

● Navigation (if so equipped) - See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for the available voice commands and operation.

● say “Dial” or “Phone dial” the system will respond with “Please say the first group of numbers”, then say:

– “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”,

– “one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”, or

● BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone

For additional information on the navigation system, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

– “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”.

Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following examples.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.

Personal vocabulary (voicetags)

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for

“0”.

Phone numbers:

Speak phone numbers according to the following examples:

NISSAN Voice Recognition provides the function called “voicetags”, which can be associated with the phone and the navigation system (if so equipped). Using your own voice, 70 voicetags can be registered in the “Phonebook” (phone) and 20 locations can be registered in the “Address Book” (navigation system).

● 1-800-662-6200

For additional information, see “Bluetooth

T

Hands-Free Phone System” earlier in this section and/or the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped) for the method of “voicetag” registration.

4-70

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH T HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

Depending on the commands, some different phrases are available. Optional words are shown in brackets [ ]. A few words, identified with a slash

/, indicate the alternate words that you can select when speaking the command. Data items that you need to enter, such as phone numbers, are indicated in italics with brackets < >.

How to say commands

Example: “[PHONE] DIAL/CALL <phone num-

ber digits> ” stands for the following possible commands.

DIAL<1 to 32 phone number digits>

CALL <1 to 32 phone number digits>

PHONE DIAL <1 to 32 phone number digits>

Help commands

● “COMMAND LIST”, “VOICE HELP” or

“HELP”

Gives spoken information about NISSAN

Voice Recognition and displays the list of help commands.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Phone commands

● “[PHONE] DIAL <phone number digits> ” or “CALL <phone number digits>

Dials the phone number given in the command. Speak the phone number in one sequence. The number is automatically dialed.

● “[PHONE] REDIAL”

Redials the phone number last dialed.

● “OUTGOING CALLS”

Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).

● “INCOMING CALLS”

Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).

● “PHONE SELECT <phone priority number

1 to 5> ” or “SELECT/CHOOSE PHONE

<phone priority number 1 to 5>

If multiple phones are registered to the system, you can change which phone to connect to the system (as long as that phone is present in the vehicle).

● “PHONEBOOK”

Shows the first page of the “phone book”list.

● “PHONEBOOK <voicetag>

Shows the specified “voicetag” entry in the

“phone book” and dials the phone number registered in the specified “voicetag” after pressing the ENTER button on the steering wheel.

● “ PHONEBOOK [PLAY] DIRECTORY” or

“PLAY PHONEBOOK [DIRECTORY]”

Dials the phone number registered in the phone book.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS (if so equipped)

For additional information, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for the voice commands available and operations.

LHA0747

VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGS

Press the SETUP button then touch the “Voice

Recognition” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-71

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LHA1014

Voice Feedback:

When this item is enabled (indicator is illuminated), vocal feedback during voice recognition system is activated. Touch the Voice Feedback

“ON” key to disable the vocal feedback during voice recognition.

4-72

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number. Try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message

Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-

NIZED” or the system fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag.

Solution

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. See Command list in this section.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Address Book Directory or Phone Directory command.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-73

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

MEMO

4-74

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Intelligent key battery discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Traction Control System (TCS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 5-23

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

WARNING

Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

5-2

Starting and driving

If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,

otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation button to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.

If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CAUTION

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.

Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.

Starting and driving

5-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pressure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section for changing a flat tire.)

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the

TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.

5-4

Starting and driving

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with

any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

Starting and driving

5-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

WSD0196

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal (MT), the ignition switch position will illuminate as follows:

Push center

● once to change to ACC.

● two times to change to ON.

● three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to the

LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position.

The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theft steering lock device.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to OFF until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position (CVT) or N (Neutral) position (MT).

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position (CVT) or N (Neutral) position (MT).

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, push the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To unlock the steering wheel, push the ignition switch while slightly turning the steering wheel right and left.

5-6

Starting and driving

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display. See

“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted in the port.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

OFF:

The ignition switch is in the off position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

ACC (Accessories):

This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position):

This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

DISCHARGE

WSD0232

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost discharged, the guide light s hicle information display. See “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section.

of the Intelligent Key port blinks and the indicator appears on the ve-

In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the port s allows you to start the engine. Make sure the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direction: The front side faces upward and the key ring side faces backward as illustrated.

Starting and driving

5-7

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

WSD0233

To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pull the Intelligent Key out of the port s

.

NOTE:

The Intelligent Key port does not charge the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the low battery indicator, replace the battery as soon as possible. See “Intelligent Key battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION

Never place anything except the Intelli-

gent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Doing so may cause damage to the equipment.

Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the

correct direction when inserting it to the Intelligent Key port. The engine may not start if it is in the wrong direction.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the

Intelligent Key port after the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. See “Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

5-8

Starting and driving

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) model:

Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector lever is in any of the driving positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor.

The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.

● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or

6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal.

Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push-button ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the selector lever to the P (Park) position (CVT) or to N (Neutral) and apply the parking brake (MT) and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Starting and driving

5-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

5-10

Starting and driving

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector lever into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

The CVT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK or ACC position.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LSD0182

To move the selector lever:

Push the button while depressing the brake pedal

Push the button to shift

Shift without pushing button

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector lever from P

(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The

brake pedal should be depressed to move the selector lever from N (Neutral) or any

drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then shift the selector lever into the P

(Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake

pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Starting and driving

5-11

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LSD0182

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted from D to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the position indicator displays 1 (first) up to

6 (sixth) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1 ⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6

5-12

Starting and driving

6 (Sixth):

Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.

5 (Fifth):

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes.

4 (Fourth), 3 (Third) and 2 (Second):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.

M1 (First):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 4 range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

When shifting down:

Move the selector lever to the 2 (down) side.

(Shifts to lower range.)

● The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the

3rd range, the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears.)

● Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Return the selector lever to the D (Drive) position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode.

In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.

In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

LSD0183

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift selector lever may not be moved from the P

(Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the selector lever button pushed.

If the battery is discharged completely, the steering wheel cannot be locked or unlocked. Do not move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.

It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section. Contact your

NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.

To move the shift selector lever, complete the following procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as shown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.

6. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of

P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode

This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated, see “Malfunction indicator light

(MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-

Starting and driving

5-13

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

tion. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then push the switch back to the ON position.

The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a

NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.

The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

Do not over-rev the engine when shift-

ing to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal

while driving. This may cause clutch damage.

Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission damage.

Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.

LSD0180

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or downshifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,

4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed.

5-14

Starting and driving

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

To back up, lift up on the shift lever ring stopping the vehicle completely.

s and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after

The shift lever ring returns to its original position when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R

(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

For QR25DE:

GEAR CHANGE

1st to 2nd

2nd to 3rd

3rd to 4th

4th to 5th

5th to 6th

For VQ35DE:

ACCEL shift point MPH

(km/h)

15 (24)

25 (40)

33 (53)

44 (71)

51 (82)

CRUISE shift point MPH

(km/h)

8 (24)

17 (27)

25 (40)

36 (58)

51 (82)

GEAR CHANGE

1st to 2nd

2nd to 3rd

3rd to 4th

4th to 5th

5th to 6th

ACCEL shift point MPH

(km/h)

15 (25)

25 (40)

31 (50)

36 (58)

43 (69)

CRUISE shift point MPH

(km/h)

9 (14)

19 (30)

26 (42)

31 (50)

37 (59)

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

For QR25DE:

Gear change

1st to 2nd

2nd to 3rd

3rd to 4th

4th to 5th

5th to 6th

For VQ35DE:

MPH (km/h)

8 (13)

17 (27)

25 (40)

36 (58)

51 (82)

Gear change

1st to 2nd

2nd to 3rd

3rd to 4th

4th to 5th

5th to 6th

MPH (km/h)

15 (24)

25 (40)

40 (64)

45 (72)

50 (80)

Starting and driving

5-15

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

PARKING BRAKE

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed.

Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

6th

QR25DE

MPH (km/h)

32 (53)

59 (95)

82 (133)

VQ35DE

MPH (km/h)

36 (58)

58 (93)

81 (131)

WARNING

Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.

Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

Do not use the gear shift in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

LSD0158

Type A

To engage: Type A, firmly depress the parking brake. Type B, pull the lever up s

.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

CVT models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position.

5-16

Starting and driving

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

CRUISE CONTROL

WSD0169

Type B

3. Type A, firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release. Type B, while pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, push the button and lower completely s

.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

LSD0184

1.

CANCEL switch

2.

ACCEL/RES switch

3.

COAST/SET switch

4.

ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or

CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:

When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

On winding or hilly roads.

On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel comes on.

Starting and driving

5-17

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light goes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake or clutch pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the shift selector lever to N

(Neutral) (CVT).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

5-18

Starting and driving

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in “Technical and consumer information” later in this manual.

Starting and driving

5-19

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING

Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for

CVT models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift

5-20

Starting and driving

SSD0488

lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB: s

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.

Starting and driving

5-21

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a

sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. See “Tire and

Loading Information label” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5

- 10 km/h).

5-22

Starting and driving

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the system electronically controls the pressure applied to each brake.

This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)

(if so equipped)

When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire may spin or slip. With the vehicle Traction Control

System (TCS), sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability while accelerating.

● When the TCS is operating, the indicator in the instrument panel blinks.

● If the indicator blinks, the vehicle is under slippery conditions. Be sure to drive carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and “Traction Control System (TCS) off indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

● If a malfunction occurs in the system, the and indicator lights come on in the instrument panel.

As long as these lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like a vehicle without the system.

WARNING

The Traction Control System is de-

signed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the Traction Control System may not operate properly and the indicator light may come on.

Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, bushings and wheels are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the Traction

Control System may not operate properly and the come on.

indicator light may

Starting and driving

5-23

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners, the Traction Control System may not operate properly and the these types of roads.

indicator light may come on. Do not drive on

If wheels or tires other than the recom-

mended ones are used, the Traction

Control System may not operate properly and the indicator light may come on.

The Traction Control System is not a

substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

When accelerating or driving on slippery surfaces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability.

● When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operating, the SLIP indicator in the instrument panel blinks.

● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road conditions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions. See

“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section.

● Indicator light

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

SLIP and indicator lights come on in the instrument panel.

As long as these indicator lights are on, the traction control function is canceled.

If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dynamic Control system OFF using the VDC OFF switch, VDC functions will be turned off. The

VDC system will still try to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to one with more traction when the VDC system switch is OFF. The SLIP indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The

ABS will still operate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is

designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

5-24

Starting and driving

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light may come on.

Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the

VDC OFF indicator light may come on.

When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners, the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the VDC

OFF indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads.

When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

If wheels or tires other than the recom-

mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light may come on.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is

not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so equipped).

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.

For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Starting and driving

5-25

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/13/08—debbie

X

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

5-26

Starting and driving

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see

“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.

Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

Engine block heaters are available through

NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature starting. The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

Starting and driving

5-27

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

MEMO

5-28

Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the

TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer to “Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R

(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

6-2

In case of emergency

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WARNING

Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is shifted into P (Park).

Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.

Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

WCE0044

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks s s at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire

2

to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

LCE0148

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and spare tire cover. Remove the jack nut wrench spare tire.

s s and wheel from the tool box. Remove the

In case of emergency

6-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

6-4

In case of emergency

LCE0149

Removing the bolt-on wheel cover (if so equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.

The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts.

The wheel cover will be removed along with the wheel when the nuts are removed.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod as illustrated.

LCE0183

Apply cloth s between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

WCE0147

Jack-up point coupe

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

WARNING

Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

WCE0160

Jack-up point sedan

Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

Never use blocks on or under the jack.

Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.

In case of emergency

6-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

LCE0020

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

WCE0056

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight.

6-6

In case of emergency

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

JUMP STARTING

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated ( s s

, s

). Lower the vehicle completely.

, s

, s

,

WARNING

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (112 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire and loading information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. See specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING

If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.

Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.

Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.

Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

In case of emergency

6-7

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.

Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.

Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

WCE0054

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P

(Park) (Continuously Variable Transmission).

Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence illustrated ( s

, s

, s

, s

).

6-8

In case of emergency

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION

Always connect positive (1) to positive

(

1) and negative (2) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

CAUTION

Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.

For manual transmission models, never

try to start the vehicle by towing it.

When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

In case of emergency

6-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING

Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.

To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.

Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to

N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P

(Park) (CVT).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).

Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

6-10

In case of emergency

6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.

Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

ACE0511

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

In case of emergency

6-11

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

6-12

In case of emergency

SCE0199A

CAUTION

Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

When towing Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models with the front wheels on towing dollies, or when towing manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground:

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ignition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism.

– Move the gearshift lever to the N

(Neutral) position.

When towing Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) or manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

LCE0138

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicle

Do not use the hook (if so equipped) to tow the vehicle.

WARNING

Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

CAUTION

Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.

Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free

a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.

Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks.

Always pull the cable straight out from

the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at an angle.

Pulling devices should be routed so

they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems.

Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

2. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

3. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R (Reverse) (MT models).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R

(Reverse) (MT models).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

4. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency

6-13

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

MEMO

6-14

In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

7-2

Appearance and care

CAUTION

Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

WAI0005

GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light: s s

Push toward rear of vehicle.

Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:

Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.

Appearance and care

7-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

CLEANING INTERIOR

Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.

Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

7-4

Appearance and care

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s natural finish.

Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what

mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with

pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

WAI0006

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side only)

This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

Appearance and care

7-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

CORROSION PROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

7-6

Appearance and care

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . 8-12

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Intelligent key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Front park/turn/sidemarker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37

Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40

Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41

Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with long service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-

SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your

NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

8-2

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Additional information on the following items with an “*” is found later in this section.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid level is between the

MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

8-4

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.

Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See the “Appearance and care” section of this manual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For manual transmission models, move the shift lever to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move the selector lever to P (Park).

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.

If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.

It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.

Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.

On gasoline engine models, the fuel

filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

CAUTION

Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

Never leave the engine or the CVT re-

lated component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,

have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

QR25DE engine

1.

Power steering fluid reservoir

2.

Engine oil filler cap

3.

Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)

4.

Air cleaner

5.

Fuse block

6.

Battery

7.

Fuse/Fusible link box

8.

Engine oil dipstick

9.

Radiator cap

10. Drive belt location

11. Engine coolant reservoir

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

8-6

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

LDI0553

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

VQ35DE engine

1.

Power steering fluid reservoir

2.

Engine oil filler cap

3.

Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)

4.

Air cleaner

5.

Fuse block

6.

Battery

7.

Fuse/Fusible link box

8.

Engine oil dipstick

9.

Radiator cap

10. Drive belt location

11. Engine coolant reservoir

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

LDI0552

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-7

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.

Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “If your vehicle overheats” found in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors, such as orange, may damage the engine cooling system.

Outside temperature down to

°C

-35

°F

-30

Genuine

NISSAN

Long Life

Antifreeze/

Coolant or equivalent

50%

Demineralized or distilled water

50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

LDI0554

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level s s

, add coolant to the MAX level

. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level s

.

If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

8-8

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

ENGINE OIL

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING

To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the engine is hot.

Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.

Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

LDI0555

QR25DE engine

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

LDI0556

VQ35DE engine

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks s ating oil level range. If the oil level is below the L (Low) mark

. This is the normal opers

, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill s

.

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WDI0214

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

WDI0492

QR25DE

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler counterclockwise.

cap by turning it

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug s

.

WDI0493

5. Remove the drain plug drain the oil.

VQ35DE

s with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See “Changing engine oil filter” later in this section.

Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

Check your local regulations.

8-10

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WARNING

Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual for drain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

WDI0494

QR25DE

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter s

.

4. Loosen the oil filter s with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-11

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WDI0495

VQ35DE

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine damage.

8-12

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

CAUTION

Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid

NS-2-V. Do not mix with other fluids.

Using transmission fluid other than

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2-V will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

When checking or replacement is required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

LDI0557

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT

MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -

80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine

NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

DO NOT OVERFILL.

Recommended

fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake and clutch system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

Clean the filler cap before removing.

Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and

should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-13

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

LDI0558

BRAKE FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN

Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT

3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

LDI0558

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir

(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

LDI0559

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.

Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warning light comes on (if so equipped).

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

8-14

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

BATTERY

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the paint.

Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

Do not expose the battery to flames or

electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.

Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-15

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WDI0224

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case.

8-16

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

LDI0302

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

DRIVE BELT

LDI0565

QR25DE engine

1.

Power steering fluid pump

2.

Water pump

3.

Generator

4.

Air conditioner

5.

Crank pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position before servicing drive belt.

The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

VQ35DE engine

1.

Power steering fluid pump

2.

Generator

3.

Air conditioner

4.

Crank pulley

LDI0564

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-17

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

SPARK PLUGS

SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs (if so equipped)

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped s spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

8-18

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs (if so equipped)

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped s spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for assistance.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

AIR CLEANER

Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

LDI0562

Type A

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter, push the tabs and pull the unit upward.

LDI0563

Type B

WARNING

Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-19

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. Refer to the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for change intervals.

If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

WDI0594

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove.

Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove.

8-20

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

BRAKES

CAUTION

After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

WDI0570

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle s s

. This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin

B

.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-21

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

FUSES

8-22

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

LDI0455

Two types of fuses are used. Type s s is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type

B

box.

is used in the passenger compartment fuse

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine compartment and passenger compartment fuse boxes.

LDI0457

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the underhood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

LDI0560

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open fuse s

.

s

WDI0452

, replace it with a new

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-23

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

8-24

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WDI0402

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WDI0452

Type A

4. If the fuse is open equivalent good fuse s

B

, replace it with an

.

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

Type B

LDI0456

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WDI0567

8-25

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

INTELLIGENT KEY

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver s into the slit s of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated

WDI0568 s

.

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

8-26

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the xenon headlight bulb (if so equipped)

WARNING

c

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Because the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.

Only touch the base when handling the

bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.

High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed:

Low beam:

Wattage: 55

Bulb no.: H11*

High beam:

Wattage: 65

Bulb no.: H9*

*: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKER

LIGHT

Bulb replacement requires the removal of the headlight assembly. If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-27

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item

Headlight assembly *

2

Low (Halogen)

Low (Xenon)

High

Park

Turn

Sidemarker

Sedan

Coupe

Front fog light (if so equipped) *

Step light

Rear combination light

Tail/Stop

Turn

Backup (reversing)

Sedan

Coupe

License plate light * 2

High-mounted stop light *

2

Inside (coupe)

Inside (sedan)

Spoiler (if so equipped)

Map light

Interior light

Trunk light

Glove box light * 2

2

Wattage (W)

5

5

55

55

35

65

27

8

8/27

27

18

13

5

18

8

8

3.4

3.4

Bulb No.*

1

H11

D2R

H9

168

3457NAK

168

W5W

H11

194

3157K

3156

921

912

W5W

LED

921

LED

B5Y

B5Y

158

658

*

1

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

*

2

See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

8-28

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Coupe

1.

Mirror-mounted turn signal light

2.

Interior light

3.

Map light

4.

Headlamp assembly

5.

Fog light (if so equipped)

6.

Step light

7.

High-mount stoplight

8.

Trunk light

9.

License plate light

10. Rear combination light

WDI0626

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-29

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Sedan

1.

Rear map light

2.

Front map light

3.

Step light

4.

Headlamp assembly

5.

Fog light (if so equipped)

6.

High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)

7.

Trunk light

8.

Spoiler mounted stoplight

(if so equipped)

9.

Rear combination light

10. License plate light

8-30

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WDI0573

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WDI0306

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth

Step light

to protect the housing.

LDI0341

Use a cloth

Map light

to protect the housing.

LDI0571

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-31

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Use a cloth

Dome light

to protect the housing.

WDI0632

8-32

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WDI0635

Rear combination light

To access the bulbs in the rear combination light:

Remove the fasteners. Carefully push back the carpet.

Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rear combination light.

Rotate the bulb(s) counterclockwise and pull out to remove: s s s s

Turn signal light

Sidemarker light

Tail/stop light

Backup light

Trunk light

WHEELS AND TIRES

WDI0343

If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light”in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-33

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so equipped). Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident.

Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

8-34

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

Do not drive your vehicle over

85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed rated tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH

(137 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury.

For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety mation Booklet.

Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Spare tire size (if so equipped).

Tire and loading information label

Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

Vehicle load limit: See loading information in the “Technical and consumer information” section.

Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

LDI0549

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later in this section.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-35

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

LDI0393

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

8-36

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Front Original Tire

Rear Original Tire

Spare Tire

Size

P215/60/R16

P215/55R17

P215/60R16

P215/55R17

T135/70R16

T135/90R16

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

220 kPa, 32 PSI

230 kPa, 33 PSI

220 kPa, 32 PSI

230 kPa, 33 PSI

420 kPa, 60 PSI

WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-37

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

WDI0395

Example

Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

1. P: The

9P9 indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information).

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of height to width.

8-38

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WDI0396

Example

s

TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Department Of Transportation.

9 The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identification mark

6. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

s sure

Maximum permissible inflation pres-

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-39

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure.

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing

8-40

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong

Class “S” chains on this vehicle will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire chains/cables, you should use a tire chain that meets the minimum clearances for your vehicle.

LDI0574

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain that is designed to provide the specified space between the installed tire chain tire meets the rim s s s and where the as shown on the chart.

Wheel size Minimum space required

16 in

17 in

.7 in (17 mm)

.2 in (4 mm)

A tire chain that provides the specified amount of space will provide the necessary clearance between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component. The minimum clearances are determined using the factory-equipped tires.

Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.

Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with tire chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-41

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WDI0258

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual for tire replacing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (112 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety mation Booklet.

Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

WDI0259

1.

Wear indicator

2.

Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

8-42

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.

Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety mation Booklet.

Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-totire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.

If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-43

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet .

8-44

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING

The spare tire should be used for emer-

gency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.

Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.

Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front (original) tires.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.

Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.

Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

8-45

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

MEMO

8-46

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-25

Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fuel

Engine oil *6

Drain and Refill

With oil filter change QR25DE

Without oil filter change

VQ35DE

QR25DE

VQ35DE

Cooling system

With reservoir

QR25DE

VQ35DE

Manual transmission gear oil

Capacity (Approximate)

US measure

20 gal

4-7/8 qt

4-7/8 qt

4-1/2 qt

4-1/2 qt

Imp measure

16-5/8 gal

4 qt

4 qt

3-3/4 qt

3-3/4 qt

Liter

75.6

4.6

4.6

4.3

4.3

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.

• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1

• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

Power steering fluid (PSF)

Brake and clutch fluid

Multi-purpose grease

Air conditioning system refrigerant

Air conditioning system oil

Windshield washer fluid

2 gal

2-1/8 gal

1-3/4 qt

1-5/8 gal

1-3/4 gal

1-1/2 qt

7.6

8.2

1.7

50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or

API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *2

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*3

Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent DOT 3

NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

HFC-134a (R-134a) *5

NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *5

Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”

*2: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT transmission, which is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*3: DEXRON™ VI type ATF can be used.

*4: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.

*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”

*6: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

9-2

Technical and consumer information

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

For 2.5L engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

For 3.5L engine

NISSAN recommends the use of premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least

91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.

The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

Technical and consumer information

9-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

9-4

Technical and consumer information

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

CAUTION

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval

WTI0183

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in “Change intervals”.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

Technical and consumer information

9-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN

A/C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.

9-6

Technical and consumer information

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model

Type

Cylinder arrangement

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Firing order

Idle speed

M/T

CVT (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug

Spark plug gap (Nominal)

QR25DE

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

4-cylinder in-line in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0) cu in (cm

3

) 151.82 (2,488)

1–3–4–2

Camshaft operation

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

No adjustment is necessary.

DILKAR6A-11 in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Timing chain

VQ35DE

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

213.45 (3,498)

1–2–3–4–5–6

FXE20HR-11

0.043 (1.1)

Timing chain

Technical and consumer information

9-7

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type

Aluminum/Steel

Aluminum/Steel

T type (Spare)

Tire size

Spare tire

Size

16 x 7JJ

17 x 7 1/2JJ

16 x 4T

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Front track

Rear track

Wheelbase

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross axle weight rating

Front

Rear

9-8

Technical and consumer information

in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg)

Offset in (mm)

1.77 (45)

1.77 (45)

1.77 (45)

P215/60R16

P215/55R17

T135/70R16

T135/90R16

Coupe

182.5 (4,636)

70.7 (1,795)

55.3 (1,405)

61.0 (1,549)

60.8 (1,544)

105.3 (2,675)

Sedan

189.8 (4,820)

70.7 (1,795)

57.9 (1,471)

61.0 (1,549)

61.0 (1,549)

109.3 (2,776)

See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the center pillar between the driver’s side front and rear doors.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER

COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

LTI0025

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

WTI0037

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

Technical and consumer information

9-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WTI0096

QR25DE

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

VQ35DE

WTI0049

LTI0197

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle

Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

9-10

Technical and consumer information

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WTI0173

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0174

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.

WTI0178

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.

Technical and consumer information

9-11

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WTI0179

9-12

Technical and consumer information

Use the following steps to mount the front license plate:

Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher at the location mark (small dimple) using a

0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the threads behind the finisher, apply only light pressure to the drill.

Mount the license plate bracket using two

8 mm slotted hex head screws.

WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information label.

is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so equipped).

● Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

Technical and consumer information

9-13

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Example

9-14

Technical and consumer information

LTI0152

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

See “Measurement of Weights” later in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

● Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Technical and consumer information

9-15

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for proper towing.

9-16

Technical and consumer information

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart found later in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.

(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system must be used.

LTI0164

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle

(including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving.

If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by

NISSAN warranties.

WTI0160

Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of the total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

TI1012M

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight

(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

Technical and consumer information

9-17

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front

GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for tongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

the

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear

Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front

Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 4,103 lb. (1861 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -

4,203 lb. (1906 kg).

● Maximum Towing Load from “Towing

Load/Specification

9 chart - 1,000 lb.

(454 kg).

4,203 lb. (1906 kg)

– 4,103 lb. (1861 kg)

= 100 lb. (45 kg)

GVWR

GVW

Available for tongue weight

1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available for towing

100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the

10 - 15% tongue weight specification even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings.

9-18

Technical and consumer information

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWING

LOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUE

LOAD

100 (45)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.

A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components.

Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.

Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground.

Sway control device

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut.

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment that has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating to the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of

Technical and consumer information

9-19

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the

Towing Load/Specification Chart earlier in this section.

CAUTION

Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-

tem, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch.

To reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the receiver when not in use.

After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt

holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust from entering the passenger compartment.

Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

9-20

Technical and consumer information

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the

If you move the shift selector lever to the P

(Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

Technical and consumer information

9-21

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect.

When going up a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. However, for long steep grades, do not stay in 1st gear when driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h) or

2nd gear when driving above 58 MPH

(93 km/h).

● If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioner system is on, turn off the air conditioner.

Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (805 km).

9-22

Technical and consumer information

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended

Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow.

This combination will help stabilize the vehicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.

● Downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use overdrive.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● Do not use cruise control while towing a trailer.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

● Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after

50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P

(Park) position.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section earlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

DO NOT tow any continuously variable

transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

Manual Transmission

● Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts.

Technical and consumer information

9-23

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

9-24

Technical and consumer information

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is

“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” condition, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

Technical and consumer information

9-25

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. Allow the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H (normal operating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least

10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least

9 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes.

9-26

Technical and consumer information

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission selector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN

Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact:

Tweddle Group

1-800-450-9491 www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Drive

Strongsville, OH 44149

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Drive

Strongsville, OH 44149

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-

387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and

Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

Technical and consumer information

9-27

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifications – if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your

insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.

NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Nongenuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

9-28

Technical and consumer information

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

10 Index

A

Active Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-13

Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-13

Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6

Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-18

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-24

Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45

Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-22

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11

Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-34, 4-40

Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-29

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) changer. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-38

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-44

Transmission selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-22

AUX jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-36, 4-42

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8

Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Bluetooth

T hands-free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-60

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-22

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-28

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-16, 8-21

Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . . .4-7

Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12

CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

CD changer (See audio system) . . . .4-34, 4-40

CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-29

Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-25

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . .1-16, 1-21, 1-23

Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-31, 1-37

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-25

Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-28, 4-32, 4-38

(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-5

(models without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28, 4-32

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-28, 4-32

Clutch

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

Console box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . .5-10

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Control panel buttons

Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-7

Setup button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

With navigation system . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Controls

Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-18

Coolant

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 2-39

D

Daytime running light system

(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

10-2

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-31

Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-14

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-11

Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

English/metric setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6

Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2

Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11

Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-25

Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-8

Block heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . . .8-11

Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-8

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5

F

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-32

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Floor mat positioning aid. . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5

Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-50

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4

Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3

Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-18

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink

T Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

H

Hands-free phone system,

Bluetooth

T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-60

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-32

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11

Active Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-27

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-18

Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-12, 4-19

HomeLink

T Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-49

Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

K

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-25

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . .3-12

Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-2

I

Ignition Switch

Push-Button Ignition Switch. . . . . . . . .5-6

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . .3-22

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-31

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-8, 2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-31

Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Remote keyless entry operation . . . . . .3-12

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Interior trunk lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

L

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10

Emission control information label . . . . .9-11

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10

Tire and Loading Information label. . . . .9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9

Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-57

Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-12

Light

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-13

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-28

10-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-10

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-27

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12

Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . .2-22

Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-51

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-48

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Lights

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Lock

Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . .3-5

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-18

Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . .3-16

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-22

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-12

Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . .2-22

Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

M

Maintenance

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

10-4

Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-31

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-22

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

N

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . .2-25

NISSAN voice recognition system. . . . . . .4-69

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10

Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . . .8-11

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5

Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Owner’s manual/service manual order information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

P

Parking

Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Phone, Bluetooth

T hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-60

Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Precautions

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-31, 1-37

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-13

Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

R

Radio

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-45

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-34, 4-40

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) changer. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-38

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9

Rear view monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26

Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6

Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-25

S

Safety

Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . .3-5

Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-31, 1-37

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-25

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2

Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4

Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9

Seat belt

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-16

Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-13

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-20

Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-17

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2

Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Setup button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-20

Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57

Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-8

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Steering

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

Supplemental air bag warning light. . .1-57, 2-13

Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-50

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-57

Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-42

Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-44

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-32

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-27

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28

Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

10-5

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-44

Tire and Loading Information label. . . . .9-11

Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41

Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42

Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-24

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3

Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-25

Towing

Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-19

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . .2-34

10-6

Transceiver

HomeLink

T Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-49

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-14

Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-13

Travel (See registering your vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Troubleshooting guide (NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73

Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-9

Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-24

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-34

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-24

Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9

Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13

Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . . .2-25

Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Voice recognition system. . . . . . . . . . . .4-69

W

Warning

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-13

Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-10

Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-11

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-32

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-22

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12

Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . .2-22

Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-51

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-57

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-44

Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-26

Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

10-7

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION

RECOMMENDED FUEL:

For 2.5L engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

For 3.5L engine

NISSAN recommends the use of premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least

91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least

87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:

● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE

BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the

“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

QUICK REFERENCE

LGS0037

Coupe

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Engine oil 8-9

Engine coolant 8-8

Window washer fluid 8-14

Passenger supplemental front impact air bag

1-42

Audio system 4-20; Air conditioner 4-11,

4-18

Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-42

Front seats 1-2

Spare tire 6-2

Trunk lid release 3-11

10. Fuel recommendation 9-3

11. Keys 3-2

12. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag

1-42

13. Seat belts 1-13

14. Fuel-filler door release 3-18

15. Driver supplemental front impact air bag

1-42

16. Hood release 3-16; Trunk release 3-16

17. Meters and gauges 2-3

18. Battery 8-15

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

QUICK REFERENCE

WGS0016

Sedan

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Engine coolant 8-8

Window washer fluid 8-14

Engine oil 8-9

Passenger supplemental front impact air bag

1-42

Audio system 4-20; Air conditioner 4-11,

4-18

Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-42

Front seats 1-2

Spare tire 6-2

Fuel recommendation 9-3

10. Keys 3-2

11. Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-42

12. Seat belts 1-13

13. Fuel-filler door release 3-18

14. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag

1-42

15. Driver supplemental front impact air bag

1-42

16. Hood release 3-16; Trunk release 3-16

17. Meters and gauges 2-3

Z

REVIEW COPY—

2008 Altima (alt)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

02/15/08—tbrooks

X

advertisement

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents